blob: bf48cde780ce1ccbb060fd589297d8feba4465d4 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00001*options.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2004 Jul 05
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Options *options*
8
91. Setting options |set-option|
102. Automatically setting options |auto-setting|
113. Options summary |option-summary|
12
13For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|.
14
15Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to
16achieve special effects. These options come in three forms:
17 boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle*
18 number has a numeric value
19 string has a string value
20
21==============================================================================
221. Setting options *set-option*
23
24 *:se* *:set*
25:se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value.
26
27:se[t] all Show all but terminal options.
28
29:se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the
30 key codes are not shown, because they are generated
31 internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal
32 codes in the GUI is not useful either...
33
34 *E518* *E519*
35:se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}.
36
37:se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on.
38 Number option: show value.
39 String option: show value.
40
41:se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.
42
43:se[t] {option}! or
44:se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi}
45
46 *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim*
47:se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the
48 current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi}
49:se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}
50:se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}
51
52:se[t] all& Set all options, except terminal options, to their
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +000053 default value. The values of 'term', 'lines' and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000054 'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi}
55
56 *:set-args* *E487* *E521*
57:se[t] {option}={value} or
58:se[t] {option}:{value}
59 Set string or number option to {value}.
60 For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
61 hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0')
62 (hex and octal are only available for machines which
63 have the strtol() function).
64 The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
65 default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
66 set). See |cmdline-completion|.
67 White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and
68 will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value}
69 is not allowed.
70 See |option-backslash| for using white space and
71 backslashes in {value}.
72
73:se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=*
74 Add the {value} to a number option, or append the
75 {value} to a string option. When the option is a
76 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
77 value was empty.
78 If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
79 are removed. Otherwise there is no check for doubled
80 values. You can avoid this by removing a value first.
81 Example: >
82 :set guioptions-=T guioptions+=T
83< Also see |:set-args| above.
84 {not in Vi}
85
86:se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=*
87 Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend
88 the {value} to a string option. When the option is a
89 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
90 value was empty.
91 Also see |:set-args| above.
92 {not in Vi}
93
94:se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=*
95 Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove
96 the {value} from a string option, if it is there.
97 If the {value} is not found in a string option, there
98 is no error or warning. When the option is a comma
99 separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option
100 becomes empty.
101 When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be
102 exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags
103 one by one to avoid problems.
104 Also see |:set-args| above.
105 {not in Vi}
106
107The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: >
108 :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3
109If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given
110and the following arguments will be ignored.
111
112 *:set-verbose*
113When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it
114was last set. Example: >
115 :verbose set shiftwidth cindent?
116 shiftwidth=4
117 Last set from modeline
118 cindent
119 Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim
120This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":set
121all" or ":set" without an argument.
122When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. There is only
123one value for all local options with the same name. Thus the message applies
124to the option name, not necessarily its value.
125When the option was set while executing a function, user command or
126autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.
127Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting
128'compatible'.
129{not available when compiled without the +eval feature}
130
131 *:set-termcap* *E522*
132For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a termcap option. This will
133override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If
134the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: >
135 :set <t_#4>=^[Ot
136This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For
137example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: >
138 :set <M-b>=^[b
139(the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)
140The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.
141
142The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000143at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000144"set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the
145|more-prompt|.
146
147 *option-backslash*
148To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a
149backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this
150means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded
151down).
152A few examples: >
153 :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags"
154 :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file"
155 :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file"
156
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000157The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To
158include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000159'titlestring' option to "hi|there": >
160 :set titlestring=hi\|there
161This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": >
162 :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there
163
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000164For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000165precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment
166variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not
167removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma,
168etc.) is used like explained above.
169There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": >
170 :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path"
171 :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path"
172 :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)
173For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes
174are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000175halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000176result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it.
177
178 *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags*
179 *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552*
180Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an
181option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: >
182 :set guioptions+=a
183Remove a flag from an option like this: >
184 :set guioptions-=a
185This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000186Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000187the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"
188doesn't appear.
189
190 *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000191Environment variables in most string options will be expanded. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000192environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable
193name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name
194are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may
195follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is
196appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: >
197 :set term=$TERM.new
198 :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.
199When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set
200opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.
201
202
203Handling of local options *local-options*
204
205Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer
206has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value. This
207allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set
208'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.
209
210The following explains what happens to these local options in specific
211situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses
212the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user
213expects is a bit complicated...
214
215When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus
216right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.
217
218When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since
219the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,
220these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a
221global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and
222global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
223thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.
224
225When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window
226options are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the
227values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the window where
228the buffer was edited last are used.
229
230It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
231When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
232using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the
233local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window
234has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but
235global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: >
236 :e one
237 :set list
238 :e two
239Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"
240command you have also set the global value. >
241 :set nolist
242 :e one
243 :setlocal list
244 :e two
245Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
246value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
247global value. Note that if you do this next: >
248 :e one
249You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000250"one". The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000251
252 *:setl* *:setlocal*
253:setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
254 current buffer or window. Not all options have a
255 local value. If the option does not have a local
256 value the global value is set.
257 With the "all" argument: display all local option's
258 local values.
259 Without argument: Display all local option's local
260 values which are different from the default.
261 When displaying a specific local option, show the
262 local value. For a global option the global value is
263 shown (but that might change in the future).
264 {not in Vi}
265
266:setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value.
267 {not in Vi}
268
269 *:setg* *:setglobal*
270:setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
271 option without changing the local value.
272 When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
273 With the "all" argument: display all local option's
274 global values.
275 Without argument: display all local option's global
276 values which are different from the default.
277 {not in Vi}
278
279For buffer-local and window-local options:
280 Command global value local value ~
281 :set option=value set set
282 :setlocal option=value - set
283:setglobal option=value set -
284 :set option? - display
285 :setlocal option? - display
286:setglobal option? display -
287
288
289Global options with a local value *global-local*
290
291Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers. For some
292global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value. You can
293set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer will then use the local
294value, while other buffers continue using the global value.
295
296For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global
297'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: >
298 :set makeprg=gmake
299then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set
300the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.
301However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use
302another 'makeprog' for it, without changing the value used for the C source
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000303files. You use this command: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000304 :setlocal makeprg=perlmake
305You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: >
306 :setlocal makeprg=
307This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the
308"<" flag, like this: >
309 :setlocal autoread<
310Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the
311local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters
312when changing the global value later).
313Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using
314":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.
315
316
317Setting the filetype
318
319:setf[iletype] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype*
320 Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if
321 not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.
322 This is short for: >
323 :if !did_filetype()
324 : setlocal filetype={filetype}
325 :endif
326< This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid
327 setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different
328 settings and syntax files to be loaded.
329 {not in Vi}
330
331:bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options*
332:opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options.
333 Options are grouped by function.
334 Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the
335 short help to open a help window with more help for
336 the option.
337 Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the
338 "set" line to set the new value. For window and
339 buffer specific options, the last accessed window is
340 used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
341 window, in which case the window below help window is
342 used (skipping the option-window).
343 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or
344 |+autocmd| features}
345
346 *$HOME*
347Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
348option and after a space or comma.
349
350On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory
351of user "user". Example: >
352 :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.
353
354On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can
355contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the
356"gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.
357
358NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
359command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".
360
361
362Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on
363the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
364
365 *:fix* *:fixdel*
366:fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD':
367 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~
368 CTRL-? CTRL-H
369 not CTRL-? CTRL-?
370
371 (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi}
372
373 If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the
374 code for backspace is alright, you can put this in
375 your .vimrc: >
376 :fixdel
377< This works no matter what the actual code for
378 backspace is.
379
380 If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can
381 use this: >
382 :if &term == "termname"
383 : set t_kb=^V<BS>
384 : fixdel
385 :endif
386< Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000387 (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000388 with your terminal name.
389
390 If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not
391 CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: >
392 :if &term == "termname"
393 : set t_kD=^V<Delete>
394 :endif
395< Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key
396 (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname"
397 with your terminal name.
398
399 *Linux-backspace*
400 Note about Linux: By default the backspace key
401 produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by
402 putting this line in your rc.local: >
403 echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys
404<
405 *NetBSD-backspace*
406 Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce
407 the right code, try this: >
408 xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace"
409< If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: >
410 keysym 22 = BackSpace
411< You need to restart for this to take effect.
412
413==============================================================================
4142. Automatically setting options *auto-setting*
415
416Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives
417to set options automatically for one or more files:
418
4191. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See
420 |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions,
421 and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started.
422 You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and
423 |:mksession|.
4242. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed.
425 This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and
426 many other things. See |autocommand|.
4273. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a
428 number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for
429 modelines. This is explained here.
430
431 *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520*
432There are two forms of modelines. The first form:
433 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}
434
435[text] any text or empty
436{white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
437{vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
438[white] optional white space
439{options} a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':',
440 where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
441 command
442
443Example: >
444 vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6
445
446The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):
447
448 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]
449
450[text] any text or empty
451{white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
452{vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
453[white] optional white space
454se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
455{options} a list of options, separated with white space, which is the
456 argument for a ":set" command
457: a colon
458[text] any text or empty
459
460Example: >
461 /* vim: set ai tw=75: */
462
463The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the chance
464that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: "vi:" and
465"vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version
4663.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be
467short for "example:").
468
469 *modeline-local*
470The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
Bram Moolenaar843ee412004-06-30 16:16:41 +0000471buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global
472options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and
473the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result
474depends on which one was opened last.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000475
476 *modeline-version*
477If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
478number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
479 vim{vers}: version {vers} or later
480 vim<{vers}: version before {vers}
481 vim={vers}: version {vers}
482 vim>{vers}: version after {vers}
483{vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
484For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: >
485 /* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */
486To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: >
487 /* vim<570: set sw=4: */
488There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".
489
490
491The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
492If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.
493
494Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
495like: >
496 /* vi:ts=4: */
497will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: >
498 /* vi:set ts=4: */
499
500If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.
501
502If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000503backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000504 /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */
505This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the
506':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".
507
508No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody
509might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines).
510
511Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could
512define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For
513example: >
514 au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif
515And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing
516"VAR".
517
518==============================================================================
5193. Options summary *option-summary*
520
521In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with
522an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used.
523
524In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"
525is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.
526
527For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is
528used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when
529'compatible' is set.
530
531Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000532are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000533different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in
534one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view
535at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain
536file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example
537the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C
538program.
539
540 global one option for all buffers and windows
541 local to window each window has its own copy of this option
542 local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option
543
544When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window
545are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the
546buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the
547'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for
548buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000549first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer
550is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000551present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the
552buffer is created.
553
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000554Not all options are supported in all versions. To test if option "foo" can be
555used with ":set" use "exists('&foo')". This doesn't mean the value is
556actually remembered and works. Some options are hidden, which means that you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000557can set them but the value is not remembered. To test if option "foo" is
558really supported use "exists('+foo')".
559
560 *E355*
561A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
562
563 *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph*
564'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise)
565 global
566 {not in Vi}
567 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
568 feature}
569 The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The
570 routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode
571 (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_)
572 outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26].
573 aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8.
574 See |rileft.txt|.
575
576 *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'*
577'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off)
578 global
579 {not in Vi}
580 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
581 feature}
582 Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to
583 avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get
584 into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See
585 'revins'.
586 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
587
588 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'*
589'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off)
590 global
591 {not in Vi}
592 {only available when compiled with the |+farsi|
593 feature}
594 When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles
595 the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set.
596
597 When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This
598 is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right
599 mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000600 mode). See |farsi.txt|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000601
602 *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'*
603'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single")
604 global
605 {not in Vi}
606 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
607 feature}
608 Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding.
609 Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
610 Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
611 letters, Cyrillic letters).
612
613 There are currently two possible values:
614 "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is
615 expected by most users.
616 "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
617
618 There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
619 those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
620 legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro,
621 Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
622 therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also
623 true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
624 file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
625 Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
626 (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
627 this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
628 by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has
629 to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP
630 when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode
631 Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
632
633 *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
634'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off)
635 global
636 {not in Vi}
637 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled
638 on Mac OS X}
639 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X
640 v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts,
641 which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays.
642 Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set
643 to its default (empty string).
644
645 *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'*
646'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off)
647 global
648 {not in Vi}
649 {only available when compiled with the
650 |+netbeans_intg| or |+sun_workshop| feature}
651 When on, Vim will change its value for the current working directory
652 whenever you open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or
653 open/close a window. It will change to the directory containing the
654 file which was opened or selected. This option is provided for
655 backward compatibility with the Vim released with Sun ONE Studio 4
656 Enterprise Edition.
657
658 *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
659'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off)
660 local to window
661 {not in Vi}
662 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
663 feature}
664 This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
665 Setting this option will:
666 - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
667 - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
668 - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
669 between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
670 - Set the 'delcombine' option
671 Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text.
672
673 Resetting this option will:
674 - Reset the 'rightleft' option.
675 - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
676 Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
677 option.
678 Also see |arabic.txt|.
679
680 *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
681 *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'*
682'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on)
683 global
684 {not in Vi}
685 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
686 feature}
687 When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
688 corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
689 take affect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
690 one which encompasses:
691 a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
692 within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
693 b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
694 c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
695 When disabled the character display reverts back to each character's
696 true stand-alone form.
697 Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
698 further details see |arabic.txt|.
699
700 *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'*
701'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off)
702 local to buffer
703 Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
704 in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not
705 type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000706 <Esc> or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor to
707 another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included in
708 'cpoptions'.
709 When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
710 reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
711 line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000712 When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
713 a different way.
714 The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
715 {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing
716 <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the
717 deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.
718
719 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'*
720'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off)
721 global or local to buffer |global-local|
722 {not in Vi}
723 When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
724 it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
725 When the file has been deleted this is not done. |timestamp|
726 If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
727 using the global value: >
728 :set autoread<
729<
730 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'*
731'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off)
732 global
733 Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
734 :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!,
735 :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a CTRL-O, CTRL-I,
736 '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file.
737 Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
738 'autowriteall' for that.
739
740 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'*
741'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off)
742 global
743 {not in Vi}
744 Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit",
745 ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.
746 Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
747 been set.
748
749 *'background'* *'bg'*
750'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light")
751 global
752 {not in Vi}
753 When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a
754 dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that
755 look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal.
756 Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used.
757 This will not always be correct.
758 Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim
759 what the background color looks like. For changing the background
760 color, see |:hi-normal|.
761
762 When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000763 the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000764 change.
765 When a color scheme is loaded (the "colors_name" variable is set)
766 setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If
767 the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
768 However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
769 be undone. First delete the "colors_name" variable when needed.
770
771 When setting 'background' to the default value with: >
772 :set background&
773< Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly,
774 in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.
775
776 When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
777 "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
778 that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to
779 "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read
780 (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background
781 color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by
782 putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value
783 of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on").
784 Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly
785 depending on the terminal name. Example: >
786 :if &term == "pcterm"
787 : set background=dark
788 :endif
789< When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups
790 will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
791 the setting of the 'background' option.
792 This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file
793 to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this
794 option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be
795 done with ":syntax on".
796
797 *'backspace'* *'bs'*
798'backspace' 'bs' string (default "")
799 global
800 {not in Vi}
801 Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
802 mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows
803 a way to backspace over something:
804 value effect ~
805 indent allow backspacing over autoindent
806 eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
807 start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
808 stop once at the start of insert.
809
810 When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used.
811
812 For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier:
813 value effect ~
814 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible)
815 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol"
816 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start"
817
818 See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want.
819 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.
820
821 *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'*
822'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off)
823 global
824 {not in Vi}
825 Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the
826 file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the
827 backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
828 written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
829 the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000830 options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831 |backup-table| for more explanations.
832 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
833 When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
834 oldest version of a file.
835 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
836
837 *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'*
838'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto")
839 global
840 {not in Vi}
841 When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
842 done. This is a comma separated list of words.
843
844 The main values are:
845 "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
846 "no" rename the file and write a new one
847 "auto" one of the previous, what works best
848
849 Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
850 "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing
851 "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing
852
853 Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
854 - Takes extra time to copy the file.
855 + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
856 has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
857 - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
858 not of the real file.
859
860 Renaming the file and writing a new one:
861 + It's fast.
862 - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
863 file.
864 - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.
865
866 The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file
867 is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and
868 and the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected,
869 a copy will be made.
870
871 The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
872 combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they
873 force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
874 exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
875 become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be
876 useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
877 hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
878 be propagated back to the original source.
879 *crontab*
880 One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
881 that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
882 the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000883 backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000884 example.
885
886 When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
887 with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and
888 symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +0000889 however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000890 group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this
891 fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
892 others.
893
894 When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has
895 the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
896 is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
897 link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't
898 rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly
899 written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
900 the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will
901 again not rename the file.
902
903 *'backupdir'* *'bdir'*
904'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
905 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp"
906 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/")
907 global
908 {not in Vi}
909 List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
910 - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
911 where this is possible.
912 - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
913 impossible!). Writing may fail because of this.
914 - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
915 as the edited file.
916 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et.al.) means to
917 put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The
918 leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
919 ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
920 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
921 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
922 name, precede it with a backslash.
923 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
924 - A directory name may end in an '/'.
925 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
926 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
927 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
928 :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
929< - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
930 of the option is removed.
931 See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
932 If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >
933 :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
934< You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
935 home directory for this to work properly.
936 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
937 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
938 uses another default.
939 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
940 security reasons.
941
942 *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589*
943'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_")
944 global
945 {not in Vi}
946 String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
947 backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
948 accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might
949 prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
950 ".bak" that you want to keep.
951
952 *'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
953'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
954 global
955 {not in Vi}
956 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
957 feature}
958 A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the
959 name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both
960 the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
961 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
962 Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
963 When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
964 default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.
965
966 *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'*
967'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600)
968 global
969 {not in Vi}
970 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
971 feature}
972 Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|.
973
974 *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'*
975'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off)
976 global
977 {not in Vi}
978 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
979 and |+sun_workshop| or |+netbeans_intg| features}
980 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality.
981
982 *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
983'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off)
984 local to buffer
985 {not in Vi}
986 This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also
987 use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few
988 options will be changed (also when it already was on):
989 'textwidth' will be set to 0
990 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
991 'modeline' will be off
992 'expandtab' will be off
993 Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
994 file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
995 separates lines).
996 The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
997 file is read without conversion.
998 NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
999 on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
1000 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set
1001 'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
1002 The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
1003 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of
1004 saved option values.
1005 To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
1006 This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
1007 files you edit.
1008 When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
1009 there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
1010 the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See
1011 the 'endofline' option.
1012
1013 *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'*
1014'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on)
1015 global
1016 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}
1017 When on the bios is called to obtain a keyboard character. This works
1018 better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console. When using a
1019 terminal over a serial port reset this option.
1020 Also see |'conskey'|.
1021
1022 *'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
1023'bomb' boolean (default off)
1024 local to buffer
1025 {not in Vi}
1026 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
1027 feature}
1028 When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
1029 Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
1030 - this option is on
1031 - the 'binary' option is off
1032 - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
1033 endian variants.
1034 Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
1035 Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it
1036 causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
1037 appear halfway the resulting file.
1038 When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
1039 check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
1040 Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
1041 don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM
1042 will be restored when writing the file.
1043
1044 *'breakat'* *'brk'*
1045'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
1046 global
1047 {not in Vi}
1048 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
1049 feature}
1050 This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
1051 break if 'linebreak' is on.
1052
1053 *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
1054'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default for "last")
1055 global
1056 {not in Vi} {only for Motif and Win32 GUI}
1057 Which directory to use for the file browser:
1058 last Use same directory as with last file browser.
1059 buffer Use the directory of the related buffer.
1060 current Use the current directory.
1061 {path} Use the specified directory
1062
1063 *'bufhidden'* *'bh'*
1064'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "")
1065 local to buffer
1066 {not in Vi}
1067 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
1068 feature}
1069 This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
1070 displayed in a window:
1071 <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option
1072 hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden'
1073 is not set
1074 unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using
1075 |:hide|
1076 delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when
1077 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
1078 |:bdelete|
1079 wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when
1080 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
1081 |:bwipeout|
1082
1083 This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
1084 special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
1085
1086 *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85*
1087'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on)
1088 local to buffer
1089 {not in Vi}
1090 When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If
1091 it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
1092 This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
1093 a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
1094 But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
1095
1096 *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382*
1097'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "")
1098 local to buffer
1099 {not in Vi}
1100 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
1101 feature}
1102 The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
1103 <empty> normal buffer
1104 nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
1105 written
1106 nowrite buffer which will not be written
1107 quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow|
1108 help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
1109 manually)
1110
1111 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
1112 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
1113
1114 Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
1115
1116 A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list. This value is
1117 set by the |:cwindow| command and you are not supposed to change it.
1118
1119 "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
1120 both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
1121 work (":w filename" does work though).
1122 both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|.
1123 There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
1124 example when you quit Vim.
1125 both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory
1126 (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
1127 file).
1128 nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
1129 file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
1130 command.
1131
1132 *'casemap'* *'cmp'*
1133'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii")
1134 global
1135 {not in Vi}
1136 Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain
1137 these words, separated by a comma:
1138 internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current
1139 locale does not change the case mapping. This only
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001140 matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding. When
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001141 "internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
1142 system library functions are used when available.
1143 keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
1144 case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
1145 This probably only matters for Turkish.
1146
1147 *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346*
1148'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")
1149 global
1150 {not in Vi}
1151 {not available when compiled without the
1152 |+file_in_path| feature}
1153 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
1154 |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched
1155 for has a relative path (not starting with "/", "./" or "../").
1156 The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
1157 |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|.
1158 The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
1159 in the current directory first.
1160 If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
1161 a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
1162 override it: >
1163 :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
1164< This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
1165 security reasons.
1166 (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
1167
1168 *'cedit'*
1169'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F)
1170 global
1171 {not in Vi}
1172 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
1173 feature}
1174 The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
1175 The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off.
1176 Only non-printable keys are allowed.
1177 The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
1178 type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: >
1179 :set cedit=<C-Y>
1180 :set cedit=<Esc>
1181< |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
1182 See |cmdwin|.
1183
1184 *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513*
1185'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "")
1186 global
1187 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
1188 feature and the |+eval| feature}
1189 {not in Vi}
1190 An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is
1191 evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
1192 different encoding from what is desired.
1193 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
1194 supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is
1195 preferred, because it is much faster.
1196 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
1197 file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first.
1198 The expression must return zero or an empty string for success,
1199 non-zero for failure.
1200 The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'.
1201 Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
1202 used.
1203 Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
1204 is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
1205 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c'
1206 flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion.
1207 Example: >
1208 set charconvert=CharConvert()
1209 fun CharConvert()
1210 system("recode "
1211 \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to
1212 \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out)
1213 return v:shell_error
1214 endfun
1215< The related Vim variables are:
1216 v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding
1217 v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding
1218 v:fname_in name of the input file
1219 v:fname_out name of the output file
1220 Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.
1221 Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different
1222 from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4.
1223 Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want
1224 to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care
1225 of this.
1226 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
1227 security reasons.
1228
1229 *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'*
1230'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off)
1231 local to buffer
1232 {not in Vi}
1233 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
1234 feature}
1235 Enables automatic C program indenting See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
1236 that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
1237 preferred indent style.
1238 If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
1239 If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
1240 the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
1241 external program.
1242 See |C-indenting|.
1243 When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
1244 option or 'indentexpr'.
1245 This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
1246 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
1247
1248 *'cinkeys'* *'cink'*
1249'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
1250 local to buffer
1251 {not in Vi}
1252 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
1253 feature}
1254 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
1255 the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
1256 empty.
1257 For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
1258 See |C-indenting|.
1259
1260 *'cinoptions'* *'cino'*
1261'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "")
1262 local to buffer
1263 {not in Vi}
1264 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
1265 feature}
1266 The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
1267 program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
1268 |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
1269
1270
1271 *'cinwords'* *'cinw'*
1272'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")
1273 local to buffer
1274 {not in Vi}
1275 {not available when compiled without both the
1276 |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features}
1277 These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
1278 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at
1279 an appropriate place (inside {}).
1280 Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't
1281 matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
1282 "if,If,IF".
1283
1284 *'clipboard'* *'cb'*
1285'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux"
1286 for X-windows, "" otherwise)
1287 global
1288 {not in Vi}
1289 {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard|
1290 feature is included}
1291 This option is a list of comma separated names.
1292 These names are recognized:
1293
1294 unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
1295 for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
1296 would normally go to the unnamed register. When a
1297 register is explicitly specified, it will always be
1298 used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
1299 or not. The clipboard register can always be
1300 explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see
1301 |gui-clipboard|.
1302
1303 autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
1304 then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
1305 area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
1306 windowing system's global selection or put the
1307 selected text on the clipboard used by the selection
1308 register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for
1309 details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in
1310 'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this
1311 "autoselect" flag is used.
1312 Also applies to the modeless selection.
1313
1314 autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
1315 only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.
1316
1317 exclude:{pattern}
1318 Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
1319 the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no
1320 connection will be made to the X server. This is
1321 useful in this situation:
1322 - Running Vim in a console.
1323 - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another
1324 display.
1325 - You do not want to connect to the X server in the
1326 console, but do want this in a terminal emulator.
1327 To never connect to the X server use: >
1328 exclude:.*
1329< This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument.
1330 Note that when there is no connection to the X server
1331 the window title won't be restored and the clipboard
1332 cannot be accessed.
1333 The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is
1334 interpreted as if 'magic' was on.
1335 The rest of the option value will be used for
1336 {pattern}, this must be the last entry.
1337
1338 *'cmdheight'* *'ch'*
1339'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1)
1340 global
1341 {not in Vi}
1342 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding
1343 |hit-enter| prompts.
1344
1345 *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
1346'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7)
1347 global
1348 {not in Vi}
1349 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
1350 feature}
1351 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
1352
1353 *'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
1354'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width)
1355 global
1356 {not in Vi}
1357 Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal
1358 initialization and does not have to be set by hand.
1359 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
1360 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
1361 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
1362 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
1363 number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.
1364
1365 *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525*
1366'comments' 'com' string (default
1367 "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-")
1368 local to buffer
1369 {not in Vi}
1370 {not available when compiled without the |+comments|
1371 feature}
1372 A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See
1373 |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
1374 insert a space.
1375
1376 *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537*
1377'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/")
1378 local to buffer
1379 {not in Vi}
1380 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
1381 feature}
1382 A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
1383 comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see
1384 |fold-marker|.
1385
1386 *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
1387'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a .vimrc file is found)
1388 global
1389 {not in Vi}
1390 This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
1391 make Vim behave in a more useful way.
1392 This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset,
1393 other options are also changed as a side effect. CAREFUL: Setting or
1394 resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001395 are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001396 set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the
1397 very start.
1398 By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the
1399 options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
1400 just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
1401 option.
1402 When a ".vimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up, this option is
1403 switched off, and all options that have not been modified will be set
1404 to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means that when a ".vimrc"
1405 file exists, Vim will use the Vim defaults, otherwise it will use the
1406 Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001407 file). Also see |compatible-default|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001408 You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with
1409 "-N". See |-C| and |-N|.
1410 Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options
1411 that have a different Vi and Vim default value. See the options
1412 marked with a '+' below. Other options are not modified.
1413 At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set
1414 or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. See the table
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001415 below. This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001416 editing.
1417 See also 'cpoptions'.
1418
1419 option + set value effect ~
1420
1421 'allowrevins' off no CTRL-_ command
1422 'backupcopy' Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy
1423 others: "auto" copy or rename backup file
1424 'backspace' "" normal backspace
1425 'backup' off no backup file
1426 'cindent' off no C code indentation
1427 'cedit' + "" no key to open the |cmdwin|
1428 'cpoptions' + (all flags) Vi-compatible flags
1429 'cscopetag' off don't use cscope for ":tag"
1430 'cscopetagorder' 0 see |cscopetagorder|
1431 'cscopeverbose' off see |cscopeverbose|
1432 'digraph' off no digraphs
1433 'esckeys' + off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode
1434 'expandtab' off tabs not expanded to spaces
1435 'fileformats' + "" no automatic file format detection,
1436 "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2
1437 'formatoptions' + "vt" Vi compatible formatting
1438 'gdefault' off no default 'g' flag for ":s"
1439 'history' + 0 no commandline history
1440 'hkmap' off no Hebrew keyboard mapping
1441 'hkmapp' off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping
1442 'hlsearch' off no highlighting of search matches
1443 'incsearch' off no incremental searching
1444 'indentexpr' "" no indenting by expression
1445 'insertmode' off do not start in Insert mode
1446 'iskeyword' + "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric
1447 characters and '_'
1448 'joinspaces' on insert 2 spaces after period
1449 'modeline' + off no modelines
1450 'more' + off no pauses in listings
1451 'revins' off no reverse insert
1452 'ruler' off no ruler
1453 'scrolljump' 1 no jump scroll
1454 'scrolloff' 0 no scroll offset
1455 'shiftround' off indent not rounded to shiftwidth
1456 'shortmess' + "" no shortening of messages
1457 'showcmd' + off command characters not shown
1458 'showmode' + off current mode not shown
1459 'smartcase' off no automatic ignore case switch
1460 'smartindent' off no smart indentation
1461 'smarttab' off no smart tab size
1462 'softtabstop' 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions
1463 'startofline' on goto startofline with some commands
1464 'tagrelative' + off tag file names are not relative
1465 'textauto' + off no automatic textmode detection
1466 'textwidth' 0 no automatic line wrap
1467 'tildeop' off tilde is not an operator
1468 'ttimeout' off no terminal timeout
1469 'whichwrap' + "" left-right movements don't wrap
1470 'wildchar' + CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab>
1471 use CTRL-E for cmdline completion
1472 'writebackup' on or off depends on +writebackup feature
1473
1474 *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
1475'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")
1476 local to buffer
1477 {not in Vi}
1478 This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works
1479 when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line
1480 completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion
1481 and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags:
1482 . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
1483 w scan buffers from other windows
1484 b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
1485 u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
1486 U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
1487 k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
1488 k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given,
1489 patterns are valid too. For example: >
1490 :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
1491< s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
1492 s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
1493 are valid too.
1494 i scan current and included files
1495 d scan current and included files for defined name or macro
1496 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
1497 ] tag completion
1498 t same as "]"
1499
1500 Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
1501 not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
1502 (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
1503 whole-line completion.
1504
1505 The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan:
1506 1. the current buffer
1507 2. buffers in other windows
1508 3. other loaded buffers
1509 4. unloaded buffers
1510 5. tags
1511 6. included files
1512
1513 As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-
1514 based expansion (eg dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns
1515 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions)
1516
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00001517 *'completefunc'* *'cfu'*
1518'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty)
1519 local to buffer
1520 {not in Vi}
1521 This option specifies a completion function to be used for CTRL-X
1522 CTRL-X. The function will be invoked with four arguments:
1523 a:line the text of the current line
1524 a:base the text with which matches should match
1525 a:col column in a:line where the cursor is, first column is
1526 zero
1527 a:findstart either 1 or 0
1528 When the a:findstart argument is 1, the function must return the
1529 column of where the completion starts. It must be a number between
1530 zero and "a:col". This involves looking at the characters in a:line
1531 before column a:col and include those characters that could be part of
1532 the completed item.
1533 When the a:findstart argument is 0 the function must return a string
1534 with the matching words, separated by newlines. When there are no
1535 matches return an empty string.
1536 An example that completes the names of the months: >
1537 fun! CompleteMonths(line, base, col, findstart)
1538 if a:findstart
1539 " locate start column of word
1540 let start = a:col
1541 while start > 0 && a:line[start - 1] =~ '\a'
1542 let start = start - 1
1543 endwhile
1544 return start
1545 else
1546 " find months matching with "a:base"
1547 let res = "Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec"
1548 if a:base != ''
1549 let res = substitute(res, '\c\<\(\(' . a:base . '.\{-}\>\)\|.\{-}\>\)', '\2', 'g')
1550 endif
1551 let res = substitute(res, ' \+', "\n", 'g')
1552 return res
1553 endif
1554 endfun
1555 set completefunc=CompleteMonths
1556< Note that a substitute() function is used to reduce the list of
1557 possible values and remove the ones that don't match the base. The
1558 part before the "\|" matches the base, the part after it is used
1559 when there is no match. The "\2" in the replacement is empty if the
1560 part before the "\|" does not match.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00001561
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001562 *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
1563'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off)
1564 global
1565 {not in Vi}
1566 When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
1567 fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
1568 instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current
1569 file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
1570 If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
1571 command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
1572 command.
1573 Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
1574
1575 *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'*
1576'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off)
1577 global
1578 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}
1579 When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001580 This should work in most cases. Also see |'bioskey'|. Together,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001581 three methods of console input are available:
1582 'conskey' 'bioskey' action ~
1583 on on or off direct console input
1584 off on BIOS
1585 off off STDIN
1586
1587 *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
1588'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off)
1589 local to buffer
1590 {not in Vi}
1591 Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
1592 new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
1593 tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled,
1594 in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the
1595 new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
1596 existing line. If the new indent is greater than on the existing
1597 line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
1598 NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
1599 Also see 'preserveindent'.
1600
1601 *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'*
1602'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs",
1603 Vi default: all flags)
1604 global
1605 {not in Vi}
1606 A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001607 this indicates vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001608 not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
1609 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
1610 Commas can be added for readability.
1611 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
1612 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
1613 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
1614 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
1615
1616 contains behavior ~
1617 *cpo-a*
1618 a When included, a ":read" command with a file name
1619 argument will set the alternate file name for the
1620 current window.
1621 *cpo-A*
1622 A When included, a ":write" command with a file name
1623 argument will set the alternate file name for the
1624 current window.
1625 *cpo-b*
1626 b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
1627 the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping,
1628 the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
1629 command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
1630 include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all
1631 mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
1632 See also |map_bar|.
1633 *cpo-B*
1634 B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
1635 abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands.
1636 Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a
1637 CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>"
1638 results in X being mapped to:
1639 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>)
1640 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters)
1641 ('<' excluded in both cases)
1642 *cpo-c*
1643 c Searching continues at the end of any match at the
1644 cursor position, but not further than the start of the
1645 next line. When not present searching continues
1646 one character from the cursor position. With 'c'
1647 "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
1648 "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
1649 *cpo-C*
1650 C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
1651 backslash. See |line-continuation|.
1652 *cpo-d*
1653 d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
1654 the tags file relative to the current file, but the
1655 tags file in the current directory.
1656 *cpo-D*
1657 D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
1658 commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
1659 |t|.
1660 *cpo-e*
1661 e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
1662 <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
1663 linewise. If this flag is not present, the register
1664 is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
1665 <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
1666 and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
1667 *cpo-E*
1668 E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
1669 "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when
1670 at least one character is to be operate on. Example:
1671 This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
1672 *cpo-f*
1673 f When included, a ":read" command with a file name
1674 argument will set the file name for the current buffer,
1675 if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.
1676 *cpo-F*
1677 F When included, a ":write" command with a file name
1678 argument will set the file name for the current
1679 buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
1680 yet.
1681 *cpo-g*
1682 g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument.
1683 *cpo-i*
1684 i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
1685 leave it modified.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001686 *cpo-I*
1687 I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
1688 indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001689 *cpo-j*
1690 j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.',
1691 not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'.
1692 *cpo-J*
1693 J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
1694 the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as
1695 white space.
1696 *cpo-k*
1697 k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in
1698 mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu
1699 commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[
1700 is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X
1701 being mapped to:
1702 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters)
1703 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code)
1704 Also see the '<' flag below.
1705 *cpo-K*
1706 K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
1707 halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when
1708 only part of the second <F1> has been read. It
1709 enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>.
1710 *cpo-l*
1711 l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
1712 literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]|
1713 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
1714 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab>
1715 *cpo-L*
1716 L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
1717 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
1718 (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
1719 the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
1720 *cpo-m*
1721 m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
1722 second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half
1723 a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'|
1724 *cpo-M*
1725 M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
1726 account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
1727 parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores
1728 backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
1729 *cpo-n*
1730 n When included, the column used for 'number' will also
1731 be used for text of wrapped lines.
1732 *cpo-o*
1733 o Line offset to search command is not remembered for
1734 next search.
1735 *cpo-O*
1736 O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
1737 when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a
1738 protection against a file unexpectedly created by
1739 someone else. Vi didn't complain about this.
1740 *cpo-p*
1741 p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a
1742 slightly better algorithm is used.
1743 *cpo-r*
1744 r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
1745 command, instead of the actually used search string.
1746 *cpo-R*
1747 R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag
1748 marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
1749 *cpo-s*
1750 s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
1751 first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001752 And it is the default. If not present the options are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001753 set when the buffer is created.
1754 *cpo-S*
1755 S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
1756 (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
1757 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
1758 The options are set to the values in the current
1759 buffer. When you change an option and go to another
1760 buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the
1761 buffer options global to all buffers.
1762
1763 's' 'S' copy buffer options
1764 no no when buffer created
1765 yes no when buffer first entered (default)
1766 X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
1767 *cpo-t*
1768 t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
1769 "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
1770 the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
1771 last used search pattern.
1772 *cpo-u*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001773 u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001774 *cpo-v*
1775 v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
1776 Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are
1777 erased from the screen right away. With this flag the
1778 screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
1779 characters.
1780 *cpo-w*
1781 w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one
1782 character and not all blanks until the start of the
1783 next word.
1784 *cpo-W*
1785 W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!"
1786 overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
1787 *cpo-x*
1788 x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
1789 The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
1790 because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>|
1791 *cpo-y*
1792 y A yank command can be redone with ".".
1793 *cpo-!*
1794 ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used
1795 external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last
1796 used -filter- command is used.
1797 *cpo-$*
1798 $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
1799 line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
1800 The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
1801 new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any
1802 command that moves the cursor from the insertion
1803 point.
1804 *cpo-%*
1805 % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
1806 Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
1807 Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
1808 Parens inside single and double quotes are also
1809 counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
1810 disturb the matching. For example, in a line like
1811 "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
1812 match the last one. When this flag is not included,
1813 parens inside single and double quotes are treated
1814 specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes,
1815 everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a
1816 paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001817 there is one). This works very well for C programs.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001818 *cpo-star*
1819 * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included,
1820 ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.
1821 *cpo-<*
1822 < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>|
1823 form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001824 menu commands. For example, the command
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001825 ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to:
1826 '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters)
1827 '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>)
1828 Also see the 'k' flag above.
1829
1830 *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'*
1831'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0)
1832 global
1833 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1834 feature}
1835 {not in Vi}
1836 Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags.
1837 See |cscopepathcomp|.
1838
1839 *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'*
1840'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope")
1841 global
1842 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1843 feature}
1844 {not in Vi}
1845 Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|.
1846 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
1847 security reasons.
1848
1849 *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'*
1850'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "")
1851 global
1852 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1853 or |+quickfix| features}
1854 {not in Vi}
1855 Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.
1856 See |cscopequickfix|.
1857
1858 *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'*
1859'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off)
1860 global
1861 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1862 feature}
1863 {not in Vi}
1864 Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|.
1865 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
1866
1867 *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'*
1868'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0)
1869 global
1870 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1871 feature}
1872 {not in Vi}
1873 Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See
1874 |cscopetagorder|.
1875 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
1876
1877 *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'*
1878 *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'*
1879'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off)
1880 global
1881 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
1882 feature}
1883 {not in Vi}
1884 Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|.
1885 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
1886
1887 *'debug'*
1888'debug' string (default "")
1889 global
1890 {not in Vi}
1891 When set to "msg", error messages that would otherwise be omitted will
1892 be given anyway. This is useful when debugging 'foldexpr' or
1893 'indentexpr'.
1894
1895 *'define'* *'def'*
1896'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define")
1897 global or local to buffer |global-local|
1898 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001899 Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001900 pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the
1901 commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is
1902 used to recognize the defined name after the match:
1903 {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
1904 See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
1905 or backslash.
1906 The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be
1907 useful, to include const type declarations: >
1908 ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
1909< When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
1910
1911 *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'*
1912'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off)
1913 global
1914 {not in Vi}
1915 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
1916 feature}
1917 If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
1918 "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the
1919 default) the character along with its combining characters are
1920 deleted.
1921 Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"!
1922
1923 This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
1924 may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
1925 to remove only the combining ones.
1926
1927 *'dictionary'* *'dict'*
1928'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "")
1929 global or local to buffer |global-local|
1930 {not in Vi}
1931 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
1932 for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should
1933 contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several
1934 words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
1935 preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001936 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001937 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
1938 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
1939 Where to find a list of words?
1940 - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".
1941 - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.
1942 - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection.
1943 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
1944 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
1945 uses another default.
1946 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
1947
1948 *'diff'* *'nodiff'*
1949'diff' boolean (default off)
1950 local to window
1951 {not in Vi}
1952 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
1953 feature}
1954 Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001955 between files. See |vimdiff|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001956
1957 *'dex'* *'diffexpr'*
1958'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "")
1959 global
1960 {not in Vi}
1961 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
1962 feature}
1963 Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two
1964 versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|.
1965 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
1966 security reasons.
1967
1968 *'dip'* *'diffopt'*
1969'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler")
1970 global
1971 {not in Vi}
1972 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
1973 feature}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00001974 Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001975 All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma.
1976
1977 filler Show filler lines, to keep the text
1978 synchronized with a window that has inserted
1979 lines at the same position. Mostly useful
1980 when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
1981 is set.
1982
1983 context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change
1984 and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
1985 When omitted a context of six lines is used.
1986 See |fold-diff|.
1987
1988 icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A"
1989 are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag
1990 to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.
1991
1992 iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds
1993 the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
1994 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation
1995 of the "diff" command for what this does
1996 exactly. It should ignore adding trailing
1997 white space, but not leading white space.
1998
1999 Examples: >
2000
2001 :set diffopt=filler,context:4
2002 :set diffopt=
2003 :set diffopt=filler
2004<
2005 *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
2006'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off)
2007 global
2008 {not in Vi}
2009 {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs|
2010 feature}
2011 Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
2012 {char2}. See |digraphs|.
2013 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
2014
2015 *'directory'* *'dir'*
2016'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
2017 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp"
2018 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp")
2019 global
2020 List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.
2021 - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
2022 possible.
2023 - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
2024 impossible!).
2025 - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
2026 the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
2027 it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden"
2028 attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
2029 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et.al.) means to
2030 put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading
2031 "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
2032 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators, the
2033 swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
2034 with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. This will
2035 ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
2036 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
2037 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
2038 name, precede it with a backslash.
2039 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
2040 - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
2041 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
2042 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
2043 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
2044 :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
2045< - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
2046 of the option is removed.
2047 Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing
2048 the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is
2049 discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file.
2050 "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better
2051 choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap
2052 files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your
2053 home directory is tried first.
2054 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
2055 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
2056 uses another default.
2057 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2058 security reasons.
2059 {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}
2060
2061 *'display'* *'dy'*
2062'display' 'dy' string (default "")
2063 global
2064 {not in Vi}
2065 Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of
2066 flags:
2067 lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002068 in a window will be displayed. When not included, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002069 last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
2070 uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
2071 instead of using ^C and ~C.
2072
2073 *'eadirection'* *'ead'*
2074'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both")
2075 global
2076 {not in Vi}
2077 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
2078 feature}
2079 Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
2080 ver vertically, width of windows is not affected
2081 hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected
2082 both width and height of windows is affected
2083
2084 *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'*
2085'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off)
2086 global
2087 Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be
2088 toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See
2089 also 'gdefault' option.
2090 Switching this option on is discouraged!
2091
2092 *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
2093'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
2094 global
2095 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
2096 feature}
2097 {not in Vi}
2098 Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in
2099 the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the
2100 viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work
2101 with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values.
2102
2103 NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the
2104 existing text in Vim. It may cause multi-byte text to become invalid.
2105 It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
2106 starts up. See |multibyte|.
2107
2108 NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to
2109 "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of
2110 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and
2111 avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002112 the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002113 versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files
2114 without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty).
2115
2116 The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002117 This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002118 iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.
2119
2120 Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will
2121 be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If
2122 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be
2123 set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|.
2124
2125 When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand
2126 event so that you can set up fonts if necessary.
2127
2128 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
2129 you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated
2130 to '-' signs.
2131 When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name.
2132 For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes
2133 "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8".
2134
2135 Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected.
2136 This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the
2137 actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and
2138 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using
2139 utf-8.
2140
2141 When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8.
2142 You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the
2143 |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus
2144 setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has
2145 effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.
2146
2147 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
2148 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.
2149
2150 *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
2151'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on)
2152 local to buffer
2153 {not in Vi}
2154 When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002155 is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002156 option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless
2157 the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in
2158 which case it is reset. Normally you don't have to set or reset this
2159 option. When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the
2160 file. When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a
2161 <EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file
2162 the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change
2163 it if you want to.
2164
2165 *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
2166'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on)
2167 global
2168 {not in Vi}
2169 When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002170 splitting or closing a window. When off, splitting a window will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002171 reduce the size of the current window and leave the other windows the
2172 same. When closing a window the extra lines are given to the window
2173 next to it (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
2174 When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
2175 is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The
2176 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
2177 Changing the height of a window can be avoided by setting
2178 'winfixheight'.
2179
2180 *'equalprg'* *'ep'*
2181'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "")
2182 global or local to buffer |global-local|
2183 {not in Vi}
2184 External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty
2185 the internal formatting functions are used ('lisp', 'cindent' or
2186 'indentexpr').
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002187 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002188 about including spaces and backslashes.
2189 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2190 security reasons.
2191
2192 *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'*
2193'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off)
2194 global
2195 Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only
2196 makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
2197 for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002198 mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002199 screen flash or do nothing.
2200
2201 *'errorfile'* *'ef'*
2202'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",
2203 others: "errors.err")
2204 global
2205 {not in Vi}
2206 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
2207 feature}
2208 Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
2209 When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
2210 following argument. See |-q|.
2211 NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that.
2212 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
2213 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
2214 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2215 security reasons.
2216
2217 *'errorformat'* *'efm'*
2218'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long)
2219 global or local to buffer |global-local|
2220 {not in Vi}
2221 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
2222 feature}
2223 Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
2224 (see |errorformat|).
2225
2226 *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'*
2227'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
2228 global
2229 {not in Vi}
2230 Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert
2231 mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be
2232 used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of
2233 this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of
2234 after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to
2235 try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that
2236 when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys
2237 won't work by default.
2238 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
2239 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
2240
2241 *'eventignore'* *'ei'*
2242'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "")
2243 global
2244 {not in Vi}
2245 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
2246 feature}
2247 A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
2248 When set to "all", all autocommand events are ignored, autocommands
2249 will not be executed.
2250 Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: >
2251 :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
2252<
2253 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'*
2254'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off)
2255 local to buffer
2256 {not in Vi}
2257 In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002258 <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002259 when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
2260 on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
2261 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
2262
2263 *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'*
2264'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off)
2265 global
2266 {not in Vi}
2267 Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current
2268 directory. If you switch this option on you should also consider
2269 setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|). Using a local
2270 .exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care!
2271 also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|.
2272 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2273 security reasons.
2274
2275 *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213*
2276'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "")
2277 local to buffer
2278 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
2279 feature}
2280 {not in Vi}
2281 Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.
2282 When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be
2283 done when reading and writing the file.
2284 When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be
2285 used (no conversion when reading or writing a file).
2286 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
2287 'encoding' is "utf-8" conversion is most likely done in a way
2288 that the reverse conversion results in the same text. When
2289 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some characters may be lost!
2290 See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be
2291 specified that can be handled by the converter, see
2292 |mbyte-conversion|.
2293 When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
2294 To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
2295 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.
2296 Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
2297 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
2298 you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are
2299 replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for
2300 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example
2301 "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".
2302 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
2303 option is set, because the file would be different when written.
2304 If you do this in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to
2305 avoid this.
2306 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
2307
2308 *'fe'*
2309 NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002310 whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002311 old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.
2312
2313 *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
2314'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom", "ucs-bom,utf-8,latin1"
2315 when 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
2316 global
2317 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
2318 feature}
2319 {not in Vi}
2320 This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
2321 an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
2322 mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one
2323 in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works,
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002324 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002325 an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used.
2326 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
2327 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants)
2328 conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse
2329 conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not
2330 "utf-8" special characters may be lost!
2331 For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
2332 will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
2333 "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer
2334 another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
2335 preferred encoding is to be used. Example: >
2336 au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
2337 \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
2338< This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
2339 non-blank characters.
2340 Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for an new file, 'fileencoding'
2341 is always empty then. This means that a non-existing file may get a
2342 different encoding than an empty file.
2343 The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
2344 (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded
2345 by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
2346 An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
2347 because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
2348 accepted.
2349 WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG:
2350 latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used
2351 utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
2352 file
2353 cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used
2354 If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
2355 See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
2356 Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
2357 is read.
2358
2359 *'fileformat'* *'ff'*
2360'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos",
2361 Unix default: "unix",
2362 Macintosh default: "mac")
2363 local to buffer
2364 {not in Vi}
2365 This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
2366 reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
2367 dos <CR> <NL>
2368 unix <NL>
2369 mac <CR>
2370 When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
2371 See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
2372 For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
2373 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
2374 works like it was set to "unix'.
2375 This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
2376 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
2377 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
2378 option is set, because the file would be different when written.
2379 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
2380 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos",
2381 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset.
2382
2383 *'fileformats'* *'ffs'*
2384'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default:
2385 Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix",
2386 Vim Unix: "unix,dos",
2387 Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos",
2388 Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos",
2389 Vi others: "")
2390 global
2391 {not in Vi}
2392 This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
2393 starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
2394 buffer:
2395 - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
2396 always. It is not set automatically.
2397 - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002398 is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002399 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
2400 buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
2401 - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
2402 <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to
2403 edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
2404 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
2405 'fileformat' is set to "dos".
2406 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002407 is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002408 preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
2409 3. If 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
2410 This means that "mac" is only chosen when "unix" is not present,
2411 or when no <NL> is found in the file, and when "dos" is not
2412 present, or no <CR><NL> is present in the file.
2413 Also if "unix" was first chosen, but the first <CR> is before
2414 the first <NL> and there appears to be more <CR>'s than <NL>'s in
2415 the file, then 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
2416 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
2417 'fileformats' is used.
2418 When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
2419 this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
2420 file only, the option is not changed.
2421 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
2422
2423 For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
2424 are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
2425 done:
2426 - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos
2427 format will be used.
2428 - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
2429 is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
2430 <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
2431 used.
2432 Also see |file-formats|.
2433 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty
2434 string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset,
2435 otherwise 'textauto' is set.
2436 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
2437 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
2438
2439 *'filetype'* *'ft'*
2440'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "")
2441 local to buffer
2442 {not in Vi}
2443 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
2444 feature}
2445 When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
2446 All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
2447 executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
2448 name.
2449 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
2450 This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable
2451 this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
2452 Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
2453 for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
2454 Example, for in an IDL file: >
2455 /* vim: set filetype=idl : */
2456< |FileType| |filetypes|
2457 Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file
2458 type that is actually stored with the file.
2459 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
2460 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
2461
2462 *'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
2463'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-")
2464 global
2465 {not in Vi}
2466 {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
2467 and |+folding| features}
2468 Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators.
2469 It is a comma separated list of items:
2470
2471 item default Used for ~
2472 stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window
2473 stlnc:c ' ' or '-' statusline of the non-current windows
2474 vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit|
2475 fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext'
2476 diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option
2477
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002478 Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002479 "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-'
2480 otherwise.
2481
2482 Example: >
2483 :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:-
2484< This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also
2485 be used when there is highlighting.
2486
2487 The highlighting used for these items:
2488 item highlight group ~
2489 stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine|
2490 stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC|
2491 vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit|
2492 fold:c Folded |hl-Folded|
2493 diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete|
2494
2495 *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'*
2496'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198*
2497 global
2498 {not in Vi}
2499 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
2500 feature}
2501 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set.
2502 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002503 toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002504
2505 *'foldclose'* *'fcl'*
2506'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "")
2507 global
2508 {not in Vi}
2509 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2510 feature}
2511 When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
2512 its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to
2513 automatically close when moving out of them.
2514
2515 *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'*
2516'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0)
2517 local to window
2518 {not in Vi}
2519 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2520 feature}
2521 When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side
2522 of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum
2523 value is 12.
2524 See |folding|.
2525
2526 *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'*
2527'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on)
2528 local to window
2529 {not in Vi}
2530 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2531 feature}
2532 When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly
2533 switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
2534 folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002535 with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002536 'foldenable' is off.
2537 This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
2538 See |folding|.
2539
2540 *'foldexpr'* *'fde'*
2541'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0")
2542 local to window
2543 {not in Vi}
2544 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2545 or |+eval| feature}
2546 The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated
2547 for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. Also see
2548 |eval-sandbox|.
2549
2550 *'foldignore'* *'fdi'*
2551'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#")
2552 local to window
2553 {not in Vi}
2554 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2555 feature}
2556 Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with
2557 characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002558 lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002559 The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|.
2560
2561 *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'*
2562'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0)
2563 local to window
2564 {not in Vi}
2565 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2566 feature}
2567 Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
2568 Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will
2569 close fewer folds.
2570 This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
2571 See |fold-foldlevel|.
2572
2573 *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'*
2574'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1)
2575 global
2576 {not in Vi}
2577 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2578 feature}
2579 Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
2580 Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
2581 some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
2582 This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002583 overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002584 ignores this option and closes all folds.
2585 It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
2586 overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
2587 When the value is negative, it is not used.
2588
2589 *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536*
2590'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}")
2591 local to window
2592 {not in Vi}
2593 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2594 feature}
2595 The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There
2596 must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The
2597 marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
2598 See |fold-marker|.
2599
2600 *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'*
2601'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual")
2602 local to window
2603 {not in Vi}
2604 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2605 feature}
2606 The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values:
2607 |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually.
2608 |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold.
2609 |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
2610 |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds.
2611 |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
2612 |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed.
2613
2614 *'foldminlines'* *'fml'*
2615'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1)
2616 local to window
2617 {not in Vi}
2618 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2619 feature}
2620 Sets the minimum number of screen lines for a fold to be displayed
2621 closed. Also for manually closed folds.
2622 Note that this only has an effect of what is displayed. After using
2623 "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
2624 than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
2625
2626 *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'*
2627'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20)
2628 local to window
2629 {not in Vi}
2630 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2631 feature}
2632 Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
2633 methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more
2634 than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
2635
2636 *'foldopen'* *'fdo'*
2637'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,
2638 search,tag,undo")
2639 global
2640 {not in Vi}
2641 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2642 feature}
2643 Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
2644 command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated
2645 list of items.
2646 item commands ~
2647 all any
2648 block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc.
2649 hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
2650 insert any command in Insert mode
2651 jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
2652 mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
2653 percent "%"
2654 quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
2655 search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
2656 (not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
2657 tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
2658 undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002659 When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. Add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002660 the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
2661 When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
2662 this option is not used. This means the operator will include the
2663 whole closed fold.
2664 Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
2665 very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
2666 In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
2667 when text is inserted.
2668 To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
2669 set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
2670
2671 *'foldtext'* *'fdt'*
2672'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()")
2673 local to window
2674 {not in Vi}
2675 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
2676 feature}
2677 An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
2678 fold. See |fold-foldtext|.
2679
2680 *'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
2681'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")
2682 local to buffer
2683 {not in Vi}
2684 This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
2685 formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is
2686 on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can
2687 be inserted for readability.
2688 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
2689 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
2690 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
2691 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
2692
2693 *'formatprg'* *'fp'*
2694'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "")
2695 global
2696 {not in Vi}
2697 The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
2698 selected with the "gq" command. The program must take the input on
2699 stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is
2700 such a program. If this option is an empty string, the internal
2701 format function will be used |C-indenting|. Environment variables are
2702 expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
2703 and backslashes.
2704 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2705 security reasons.
2706
2707 *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
2708'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off)
2709 global
2710 {not in Vi}
2711 When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that
2712 all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag
2713 is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution
2714 of all or one match. See |complex-change|.
2715
2716 command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~
2717 :s/// subst. all subst. one
2718 :s///g subst. one subst. all
2719 :s///gg subst. all subst. one
2720
2721 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
2722
2723 *'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
2724'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l%m,%f %l%m")
2725 global
2726 {not in Vi}
2727 Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
2728 This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
2729 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.
2730
2731 *'grepprg'* *'gp'*
2732'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ",
2733 Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null",
2734 Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n",
2735 VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ")
2736 global or local to buffer |global-local|
2737 {not in Vi}
2738 Program to use for the ":grep" command. This option may contain '%'
2739 and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
2740 line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
2741 will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See
2742 |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
2743 When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
2744 also work well with a single file: >
2745 :set grepprg=grep\ -nH
2746< See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
2747 apply equally to 'grepprg'.
2748 For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,
2749 otherwise it's "grep -n".
2750 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
2751 security reasons.
2752
2753 *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549*
2754'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor,
2755 ve:ver35-Cursor,
2756 o:hor50-Cursor,
2757 i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor,
2758 r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor,
2759 sm:block-Cursor
2760 -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175",
2761 for MS-DOS and Win32 console:
2762 "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15,
2763 r-cr:hor30,sm:block")
2764 global
2765 {not in Vi}
2766 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and
2767 for MS-DOS and Win32 console}
2768 This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002769 modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002770 the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by
2771 specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
2772 horizontal cursor.
2773
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002774 The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002775 mode-list and an argument-list:
2776 mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
2777 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
2778 n Normal mode
2779 v Visual mode
2780 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
2781 if not specified)
2782 o Operator-pending mode
2783 i Insert mode
2784 r Replace mode
2785 c Command-line Normal (append) mode
2786 ci Command-line Insert mode
2787 cr Command-line Replace mode
2788 sm showmatch in Insert mode
2789 a all modes
2790 The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
2791 hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
2792 ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
2793 block block cursor, fills the whole character
2794 [only one of the above three should be present]
2795 blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking*
2796 blinkon{N}
2797 blinkoff{N}
2798 blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
2799 the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
2800 the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
2801 cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one
2802 of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The
2803 default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250".
2804 These numbers are used for a missing entry. This
2805 means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch
2806 blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only
2807 blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while
2808 executing a command.
2809 To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see
2810 |xterm-blink|.
2811 {group-name}
2812 a highlight group name, that sets the color and font
2813 for the cursor
2814 {group-name}/{group-name}
2815 Two highlight group names, the first is used when
2816 no language mappings are used, the other when they
2817 are. |language-mapping|
2818
2819 Examples of parts:
2820 n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
2821 block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
2822 highlight group
2823 i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
2824 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
2825 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
2826 "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit
2827 faster.
2828
2829 The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for
2830 all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used
2831 to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off
2832 blinking: "a:blinkon0"
2833
2834 Examples of cursor highlighting: >
2835 :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
2836 :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
2837<
2838 *'guifont'* *'gfn'*
2839 *E235* *E596* *E610* *E611*
2840'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "")
2841 global
2842 {not in Vi}
2843 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
2844 This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
2845 In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When
2846 the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other
2847 font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
2848 The first valid font is used.
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002850 When 'guifontset' is not empty, 'guifont' is not used.
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002851
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002852 Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name
2853 precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra
2854 backslash before a space and a backslash. See also
2855 |option-backslash|. For example: >
2856 :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002857< will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002858 will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002859
2860 If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
2861 If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
2862 settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
2863 will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
2864 the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim
2865 will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.
2866
2867 For Win32, GTK and Photon only: >
2868 :set guifont=*
2869< will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.
2870
2871 The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a
2872 way to set 'guifont' for various systems.
2873
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002874 For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: >
2875 :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11
2876< That's all. XLFDs are no longer accepted.
2877 *E236*
2878 Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002879 width). An exception is GTK 2: all fonts are accepted, but
2880 mono-spaced fonts look best.
2881
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002882 To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
2883 program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002884
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002885 For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245*
2886 - takes these options in the font name:
2887 hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
2888 wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
2889 b - bold
2890 i - italic
2891 u - underline
2892 s - strikeout
2893 cXX - character set XX. valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
2894 BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
2895 HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
2896 SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
2897
2898 Use a ':' to separate the options.
2899 - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
2900 backslashes to escape the spaces.
2901 - Examples: >
2902 :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
2903 :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
2904< See also |font-sizes|.
2905
2906 *'guifontset'* *'gfs'*
2907 *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598*
2908'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "")
2909 global
2910 {not in Vi}
2911 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
2912 with the |+xfontset| feature}
2913 {not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
2914 When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first
2915 one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See
2916 |xfontset|.
2917 Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as
2918 a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the
2919 |:highlight| command.
2920 The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the
2921 character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting
2922 'guifontset' will fail.
2923 Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'
2924 the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be
2925 used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,
2926 including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative
2927 fontset names.
2928 This example works on many X11 systems: >
2929 :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*
2930<
2931 *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534*
2932'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "")
2933 global
2934 {not in Vi}
2935 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
2936 When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used
2937 for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is
2938 used.
2939 Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
2940 specified with 'guifont' and the same height.
2941
2942 All GUI versions but GTK+ 2:
2943
2944 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and
2945 'guifontset' is empty or invalid.
2946 When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and
2947 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching
2948 double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.
2949
2950 GTK+ 2 GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk2*
2951
2952 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width
2953 characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".
2954 Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002955 automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002956 font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need
2957 to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
2958 made by Pango/Xft.
2959
2960 *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
2961'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50)
2962 global
2963 {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI}
2964 The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting
2965 the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started,
2966 e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00002967 be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002968 lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the
2969 screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the
2970 screen.
2971
2972 *'guioptions'* *'go'*
2973'guioptions' 'go' string (default "gmrLtT" (MS-Windows),
2974 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena)
2975 global
2976 {not in Vi}
2977 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00002978 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002979 sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
2980 GUI should be used.
2981 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
2982 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
2983
2984 Valid letters are as follows:
2985 *guioptions_a*
2986 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
2987 or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
2988 the windowing system's global selection. This means that the
2989 Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
2990 applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode
2991 ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
2992 application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
2993 is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
2994 Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
2995 applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
2996 If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
2997 windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
2998 by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
2999 The same applies to the modeless selection.
3000
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003001 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003002 applies to the modeless selection.
3003
3004 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~
3005 "" - -
3006 "a" yes yes
3007 "A" - yes
3008 "aA" yes yes
3009
3010 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
3011 choices.
3012
3013 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell
3014 where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the
3015 editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you
3016 can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the
3017 foreground. |gui-fork|
3018 Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have
3019 happened already when the gvimrc file is read.
3020
3021 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
3022 corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
3023 limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|.
3024
3025 'm' Menu bar is present.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003026 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003027 that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
3028 switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the .gvimrc
3029 file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
3030 ":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
3031 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If
3032 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
3033 Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.
3034
3035 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32,
3036 GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.
3037 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, and
3038 Athena GUIs.
3039
3040 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
3041 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
3042 split window.
3043 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
3044 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
3045 split window.
3046 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on
3047 the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
3048 flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
3049 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
3050 line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|
3051
3052 And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
3053 you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.
3054
3055 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included,
3056 a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
3057 vertical layout is used anyway.
3058 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some
3059 window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
3060 the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done
3061 before starting the GUI. Set it in your gvimrc. Adding or
3062 removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003063 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003064
3065 *'guipty'* *'noguipty'*
3066'guipty' boolean (default on)
3067 global
3068 {not in Vi}
3069 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
3070 Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for
3071 I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|.
3072
3073 *'helpfile'* *'hf'*
3074'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
3075 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")
3076 global
3077 {not in Vi}
3078 Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be
3079 placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories
3080 in 'runtimepath' will be used.
3081 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example:
3082 "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003083 tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003084 spaces and backslashes.
3085 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
3086 security reasons.
3087
3088 *'helpheight'* *'hh'*
3089'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20)
3090 global
3091 {not in Vi}
3092 {not available when compiled without the +windows
3093 feature}
3094 Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
3095 ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the
3096 current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
3097 windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
3098 set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable.
3099
3100 *'helplang'* *'hlg'*
3101'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty)
3102 global
3103 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang|
3104 feature}
3105 {not in Vi}
3106 Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language
3107 for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always
3108 be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over
3109 another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
3110 language and not in the English help.
3111 Example: >
3112 :set helplang=de,it
3113< This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
3114 files.
3115 When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
3116 try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
3117 See |help-translated|.
3118
3119 *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'*
3120'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off)
3121 global
3122 {not in Vi}
3123 When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a
3124 buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still
3125 displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course.
3126 The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer
3127 hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is
3128 modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!'
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003129 flag was used. See also |windows.txt|.
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00003130 To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003131 This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
3132 WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers.
3133 Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!".
3134
3135 *'highlight'* *'hl'*
3136'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string):
3137 "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
3138 e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
3139 M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
3140 s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit
3141 t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
3142 f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
3143 C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
3144 >:SignColumn")
3145 global
3146 {not in Vi}
3147 This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
3148 occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The
3149 first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003150 use for that occasion. The occasions are:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003151 |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map"
3152 |hl-NonText| @ '~' and '@' at the end of the window and
3153 characters from 'showbreak'
3154 |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special
3155 things in listings
3156 |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages
3157 h (obsolete, ignored)
3158 |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting
3159 |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')
3160 |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt|
3161 |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
3162 |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands
3163 |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
3164 |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line|
3165 |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows
3166 |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
3167 |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows
3168 |hl-Visual| v Visual mode
3169 |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the
3170 Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and
3171 |xterm-clipboard|.
3172 |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages
3173 |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'
3174 |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds
3175 |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn'
3176 |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs|
3177
3178 The display modes are:
3179 r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me")
3180 i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR")
3181 b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me")
3182 s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se")
3183 u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue")
3184 n no highlighting
3185 - no highlighting
3186 : use a highlight group
3187 The default is used for occasions that are not included.
3188 If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors|
3189 for an example.
3190 When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of
3191 a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type
3192 of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to
3193 define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion.
3194 See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups.
3195
3196 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'*
3197'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off)
3198 global
3199 {not in Vi}
3200 {not available when compiled without the
3201 |+extra_search| feature}
3202 When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
3203 The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the
3204 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by
3205 default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
3206 are not applied.
3207 See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
3208 When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
3209 off with |:nohlsearch|. As soon as you use a search command, the
3210 highlighting comes back.
3211 When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
3212 highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003213 search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003214 line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not
3215 drawn may not continue in an newly drawn line.
3216 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3217
3218 *'history'* *'hi'*
3219'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0)
3220 global
3221 {not in Vi}
3222 A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
3223 are remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in
3224 each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
3225 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
3226 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
3227
3228 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'*
3229'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off)
3230 global
3231 {not in Vi}
3232 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
3233 feature}
3234 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set.
3235 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
3236 toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|.
3237 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3238
3239 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'*
3240'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off)
3241 global
3242 {not in Vi}
3243 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
3244 feature}
3245 When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on.
3246 This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard.
3247 See |rileft.txt|.
3248 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3249
3250 *'icon'* *'noicon'*
3251'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
3252 global
3253 {not in Vi}
3254 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
3255 feature}
3256 When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
3257 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
3258 currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used.
3259 Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
3260 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently
3261 only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are
3262 Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the
3263 builtin termcap).
3264 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
3265 restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on
3266 X11.
3267
3268 *'iconstring'*
3269'iconstring' string (default "")
3270 global
3271 {not in Vi}
3272 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
3273 feature}
3274 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
3275 the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
3276 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
3277 (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option).
3278 Does not work for MS Windows.
3279 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
3280 restored if possible |X11|.
3281 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003282 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003283 'titlestring' for example settings.
3284 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
3285
3286 *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'*
3287'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off)
3288 global
3289 Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags
3290 file.
3291 Also see 'smartcase'.
3292 Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
3293 |/ignorecase|.
3294
3295 *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'*
3296'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "")
3297 global
3298 {not in Vi}
3299 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and
3300 |+GUI_GTK|}
3301 Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for
3302 activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control
3303 IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.
3304 You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option
3305 tells Vim what the key is.
3306 Format:
3307 [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING
3308
3309 These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored):
3310 S Shift key
3311 L Lock key
3312 C Control key
3313 1 Mod1 key
3314 2 Mod2 key
3315 3 Mod3 key
3316 4 Mod4 key
3317 5 Mod5 key
3318 Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are
3319 both shift+ctrl+space.
3320 See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING.
3321
3322 Example: >
3323 :set imactivatekey=S-space
3324< "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 +
3325 canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean).
3326
3327 *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'*
3328'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off)
3329 global
3330 {not in Vi}
3331 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|
3332 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
3333 When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
3334 line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
3335 Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
3336 English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
3337 characters with dead keys.
3338
3339 *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'nodisable'* *'noimd'*
3340'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
3341 global
3342 {not in Vi}
3343 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|
3344 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
3345 When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable
3346 the IM when it doesn't work properly.
3347 Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This
3348 may change in later releases.
3349
3350 *'iminsert'* *'imi'*
3351'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
3352 local to buffer
3353 {not in Vi}
3354 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
3355 Insert mode. Valid values:
3356 0 :lmap is off and IM is off
3357 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
3358 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
3359 2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim|
3360 or |global-ime|.
3361 To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
3362 this can be used: >
3363 :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
3364< This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
3365 mode.
3366 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
3367 |i_CTRL-^|.
3368 The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
3369 It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
3370 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
3371 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
3372
3373 *'imsearch'* *'ims'*
3374'imsearch' 'ims' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
3375 local to buffer
3376 {not in Vi}
3377 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
3378 entering a search pattern. Valid values:
3379 -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
3380 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
3381 0 :lmap is off and IM is off
3382 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
3383 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
3384 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
3385 |c_CTRL-^|.
3386 The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
3387 option to a valid keymap name.
3388 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
3389 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
3390
3391 *'include'* *'inc'*
3392'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include")
3393 global or local to buffer |global-local|
3394 {not in Vi}
3395 {not available when compiled without the
3396 |+find_in_path| feature}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003397 Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003398 pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default
3399 value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i",
3400 "]I", "[d", etc.. The 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file
3401 name that comes after the matched pattern. See |option-backslash|
3402 about including spaces and backslashes.
3403
3404 *'includeexpr'* *'inex'*
3405'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "")
3406 local to buffer
3407 {not in Vi}
3408 {not available when compiled without the
3409 |+find_in_path| or |+eval| feature}
3410 Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003411 option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003412 :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
3413< The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
3414 Evaluated in the |sandbox|.
3415 Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003416 found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003417 Also used for |<cfile>|.
3418
3419 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
3420'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off)
3421 global
3422 {not in Vi}
3423 {not available when compiled without the
3424 |+extra_search| feature}
3425 While typing a search command, show immediately where the so far
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003426 typed pattern matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003427 pattern is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will
3428 be updated often, this is only useful on fast terminals. Note that
3429 the match will be shown, but the cursor is not actually positioned
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003430 there. You still need to finish the search command with <CR> to move
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003431 the cursor. The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in
3432 'highlight'. See also: 'hlsearch'.
3433 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3434
3435 *'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
3436'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "")
3437 local to buffer
3438 {not in Vi}
3439 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
3440 or |+eval| features}
3441 Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
3442 It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
3443 in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
3444 When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
3445 'smartindent' indenting.
3446 When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting.
3447 The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
3448 which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also as this line
3449 when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).
3450 The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It
3451 can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
3452 used for the indent).
3453 Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
3454 and |lispindent()|.
3455 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must
3456 not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the
3457 cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
3458 Normally this option would be set to call a function: >
3459 :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
3460< Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
3461 "msg".
3462 See |indent-expression|. Also see |eval-sandbox|.
3463 NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.
3464
3465 *'indentkeys'* *'indk'*
3466'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
3467 local to buffer
3468 {not in Vi}
3469 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
3470 feature}
3471 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
3472 the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
3473 The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
3474 See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
3475
3476 *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'*
3477'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off)
3478 local to buffer
3479 {not in Vi}
3480 When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
3481 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted. If the
3482 typed text contains a lowercase letter where the match has an upper
3483 case letter, the completed part is made lowercase. If the typed text
3484 has no lowercase letters and the match has a lowercase letter where
3485 the typed text has an uppercase letter, and there is a letter before
3486 it, the completed part is made uppercase.
3487
3488 *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'*
3489'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off)
3490 global
3491 {not in Vi}
3492 Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful
3493 if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|.
3494 These Insert mode commands will be useful:
3495 - Use the cursor keys to move around.
3496 - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|). When
3497 this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.
3498 Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.
3499 *i_CTRL-L*
3500 - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use
3501 <Esc> to get back to Insert mode.
3502
3503 These items change when 'insertmode' is set:
3504 - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode.
3505 - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps.
3506 - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode.
3507 - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted.
3508 - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z*
3509 However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like
3510 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same
3511 mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set.
3512 When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used.
3513
3514 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
3515
3516 *'isfname'* *'isf'*
3517'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
3518 "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,="
3519 for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:"
3520 for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~"
3521 for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="
3522 otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")
3523 global
3524 {not in Vi}
3525 The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
3526 path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003527 the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003528 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
3529 characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
3530 For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
3531
3532 Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
3533 do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit
3534 tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
3535 characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
3536 name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The
3537 '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
3538 cmd.exe.
3539
3540 The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003541 Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two
3542 character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003543 decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
3544 not work for digits). Example:
3545 "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range
3546 128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
3547 If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
3548 will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left
3549 to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is
3550 included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
3551 option or the end of a range. Example:
3552 "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
3553 If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
3554 are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
3555 plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples:
3556 "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
3557 case letters.
3558 "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character.
3559 A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
3560 expected. Example:
3561 "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore.
3562 A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example:
3563 " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding
3564 comma, plus <Tab>.
3565 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
3566
3567 *'isident'* *'isi'*
3568'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
3569 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
3570 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")
3571 global
3572 {not in Vi}
3573 The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
3574 Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
3575 match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a
3576 |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
3577 option.
3578 Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003579 environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003580 expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead.
3581
3582 *'iskeyword'* *'isk'*
3583'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32:
3584 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
3585 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"
3586 Vi default: "@,48-57,_")
3587 local to buffer
3588 {not in Vi}
3589 Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003590 "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003591 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C
3592 programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
3593 For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
3594 '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
3595 command).
3596 When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
3597 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
3598 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
3599
3600 *'isprint'* *'isp'*
3601'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh:
3602 "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255")
3603 global
3604 {not in Vi}
3605 The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
3606 screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from
3607 space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
3608 even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See
3609 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.
3610
3611 Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
3612 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_"
3613 32 - 126 always single characters
3614 127 "^?"
3615 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_"
3616 160 - 254 "| " - "|~"
3617 255 "~?"
3618 When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are
3619 displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
3620 When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
3621 displayed as <xx>.
3622 The NonText highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
3623 |hl-NonText|
3624
3625 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
3626 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character
3627 is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
3628 replacement character will be shown.
3629 Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
3630 There is no option to specify these characters.
3631
3632 *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'*
3633'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on)
3634 global
3635 {not in Vi}
3636 Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
3637 When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'.
3638 Otherwise only one space is inserted.
3639 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
3640
3641 *'key'*
3642'key' string (default "")
3643 local to buffer
3644 {not in Vi}
3645 The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.
3646 See |encryption|.
3647 Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed
3648 key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: >
3649 :set key=
3650< It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or
3651 "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't
3652 know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it,
3653 be careful not to make a typing error!
3654
3655 *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544*
3656'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "")
3657 local to buffer
3658 {not in Vi}
3659 {only available when compiled with the |+keymap|
3660 feature}
3661 Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|.
3662 Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
3663 setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
3664 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
3665
3666 *'keymodel'* *'km'*
3667'keymodel' 'km' string (default "")
3668 global
3669 {not in Vi}
3670 List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys
3671 can do. These values can be used:
3672 startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
3673 Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
3674 present in 'selectmode').
3675 stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
3676 Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
3677 <PageUp> and <PageDown>.
3678 The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
3679
3680 *'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
3681'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help",
3682 OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")
3683 global or local to buffer |global-local|
3684 {not in Vi}
3685 Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are
3686 expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
3687 help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
3688 value did this, which is now deprecated.)
3689 When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the
3690 "K" command to a section number. Also for "man -s", in which case the
3691 "-s" is removed when there is no count.
3692 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
3693 Example: >
3694 :set keywordprg=man\ -s
3695< This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
3696 security reasons.
3697
3698 *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358*
3699'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "")
3700 global
3701 {not in Vi}
3702 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap|
3703 feature}
3704 This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003705 mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003706 inserted directly. When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes
3707 care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
3708 of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
3709 be able to execute Normal mode commands.
3710 This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
3711 mapped in Insert mode.
3712 This only works for 8-bit characters. The value of 'langmap' may be
3713 specified with multi-byte characters (e.g., UTF-8), but only the lower
3714 8 bits of each character will be used.
3715
3716 Example (for Greek): *greek* >
3717 :set langmap=ÁA,ÂB,ØC,ÄD,ÅE,ÖF,ÃG,ÇH,ÉI,ÎJ,ÊK,ËL,ÌM,ÍN,ÏO,ÐP,QQ,ÑR,ÓS,ÔT,ÈU,ÙV,WW,×X,ÕY,ÆZ,áa,âb,øc,äd,åe,öf,ãg,çh,éi,îj,êk,ël,ìm,ín,ïo,ðp,qq,ñr,ós,ôt,èu,ùv,òw,÷x,õy,æz
3718< Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
3719 :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
3720<
3721 The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each
3722 part can be in one of two forms:
3723 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately
3724 followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
3725 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"
3726 characters. Example: "abc;ABC"
3727 Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
3728 Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are
3729 ";", ',' and backslash itself.
3730
3731 This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
3732 back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will
3733 be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
3734 langmap mappings) in the following cases:
3735 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
3736 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
3737 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
3738 Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
3739 this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time
3740 allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
3741 Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
3742
3743 *'langmenu'* *'lm'*
3744'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "")
3745 global
3746 {not in Vi}
3747 {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and
3748 |+multi_lang| features}
3749 Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded
3750 from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >
3751 "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim"
3752< (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
3753 matter what $LANG is set to: >
3754 :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
3755< When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
3756 If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
3757 the English menus: >
3758 :set langmenu=none
3759< This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
3760 detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting
3761 this option has no effect. But you could do this: >
3762 :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
3763 :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
3764 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
3765< Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
3766
3767 *'laststatus'* *'ls'*
3768'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1)
3769 global
3770 {not in Vi}
3771 The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
3772 status line:
3773 0: never
3774 1: only if there are at least two windows
3775 2: always
3776 The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
3777 windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
3778
3779 *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'*
3780'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off)
3781 global
3782 {not in Vi}
3783 When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
3784 executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003785 typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003786 update use |:redraw|.
3787
3788 *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'*
3789'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off)
3790 local to window
3791 {not in Vi}
3792 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
3793 feature}
3794 If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
3795 than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike
3796 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
3797 it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. The
3798 value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.
3799 This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on.
3800 Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
3801 with the right amount of white space.
3802
3803 *'lines'* *E593*
3804'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height)
3805 global
3806 Number of lines of the Vim window.
3807 Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the
3808 terminal initialization code.
3809 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
3810 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
3811 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
3812 Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can
3813 use this command to get the tallest window possible: >
3814 :set lines=999
3815< If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.
3816 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
3817 number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.
3818
3819 *'linespace'* *'lsp'*
3820'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI)
3821 global
3822 {not in Vi}
3823 {only in the GUI}
3824 Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font
3825 uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
3826 When non-zero there is room for underlining.
3827
3828 *'lisp'* *'nolisp'*
3829'lisp' boolean (default off)
3830 local to buffer
3831 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
3832 feature}
3833 Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
3834 the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with
3835 "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p'
3836 flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or
3837 better. Also see 'lispwords'.
3838 The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the
3839 "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
3840 calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
3841 This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
3842 {Vi: Does it a little bit differently}
3843
3844 *'lispwords'* *'lw'*
3845'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long)
3846 global
3847 {not in Vi}
3848 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
3849 feature}
3850 Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting.
3851 |'lisp'|
3852
3853 *'list'* *'nolist'*
3854'list' boolean (default off)
3855 local to window
3856 List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I, show end of line with $. Useful to
3857 see the difference between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks.
3858 Note that this will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' or
3859 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for
3860 changing the way tabs are displayed.
3861
3862 *'listchars'* *'lcs'*
3863'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$")
3864 global
3865 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003866 Strings to use in 'list' mode. It is a comma separated list of string
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003867 settings.
3868 eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When
3869 omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
3870 line.
3871 tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a Tab. The first
3872 char is used once. The second char is repeated to
3873 fill the space that the Tab normally occupies.
3874 "tab:>-" will show a Tab that takes four spaces as
3875 ">---". When omitted, a Tab is show as ^I.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003876 trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003877 trailing spaces are blank.
3878 extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
3879 off and the line continues beyond the right of the
3880 screen.
3881 precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
3882 is off and there is text preceding the character
3883 visible in the first column.
Bram Moolenaar592e0a22004-07-03 16:05:59 +00003884 nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
3885 0xA0, 160). Left blank when omitted.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003886
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003887 The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003888 be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
3889 characters are allowed.
3890
3891 Examples: >
3892 :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00003893 :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003894 :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
3895< The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00003896 "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003897
3898 *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'*
3899'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on)
3900 global
3901 {not in Vi}
3902 When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
3903 This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
3904 of plugins.
3905 Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
3906 reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
3907
3908 *'magic'* *'nomagic'*
3909'magic' boolean (default on)
3910 global
3911 Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.
3912 See |pattern|.
3913 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep
3914 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with
3915 old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when
3916 'magic' is on.
3917
3918 *'makeef'* *'mef'*
3919'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "")
3920 global
3921 {not in Vi}
3922 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
3923 feature}
3924 Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
3925 and the |:grep| command.
3926 When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
3927 When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
3928 unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
3929 existing file.
3930 NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that.
3931 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
3932 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
3933 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
3934 security reasons.
3935
3936 *'makeprg'* *'mp'*
3937'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS")
3938 global or local to buffer |global-local|
3939 {not in Vi}
3940 Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. This
3941 option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded like
3942 when used in a command-line. Environment variables are expanded
3943 |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and
3944 backslashes. Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set"
3945 and once for the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter
3946 called "myfilter" do it like this: >
3947 :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
3948< The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
3949 where the arguments will be included, for example: >
3950 :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
3951< This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
3952 security reasons.
3953
3954 *'matchpairs'* *'mps'*
3955'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]")
3956 local to buffer
3957 {not in Vi}
3958 Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00003959 other. Currently only single character pairs are allowed, and they
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003960 must be different. The characters must be separated by a colon. The
3961 pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and '>'
3962 (HTML): >
3963 :set mps+=<:>
3964
3965< A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
3966 assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >
3967 :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;
3968
3969< For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
3970 the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help|
3971
3972 *'matchtime'* *'mat'*
3973'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5)
3974 global
3975 {not in Vi}{in Nvi}
3976 Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
3977 set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
3978 set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi.
3979
3980 *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
3981'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100)
3982 global
3983 {not in Vi}
3984 Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally
3985 catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with
3986 more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use
3987 more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
3988 See also |:function|.
3989
3990 *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223*
3991'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000)
3992 global
3993 {not in Vi}
3994 Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
3995 character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like
3996 ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg",
3997 because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also
3998 |key-mapping|.
3999
4000 *'maxmem'* *'mm'*
4001'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system
4002 dependent) or half the amount of memory
4003 available)
4004 global
4005 {not in Vi}
4006 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this
4007 limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause
4008 other memory to be freed. Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work
4009 without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'.
4010
4011 *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'*
4012'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system
4013 dependent) or half the amount of memory
4014 available)
4015 global
4016 {not in Vi}
4017 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for all buffers together.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004018 Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. Also see
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004019 'maxmem'.
4020
4021 *'menuitems'* *'mis'*
4022'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25)
4023 global
4024 {not in Vi}
4025 {not available when compiled without the |+menu|
4026 feature}
4027 Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are
4028 generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this
4029 option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
4030
4031 *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'*
4032'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
4033 local to buffer
4034 *'modelines'* *'mls'*
4035'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5)
4036 global
4037 {not in Vi}
4038 If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
4039 checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
4040 no lines are checked. See |modeline|.
4041 NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
4042 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
4043
4044 *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'*
4045'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on)
4046 local to buffer
4047 {not in Vi} *E21*
4048 When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and
4049 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
4050 Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument.
4051
4052 *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'*
4053'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off)
4054 local to buffer
4055 {not in Vi}
4056 When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set
4057 when:
4058 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the
4059 |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
4060 option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the
4061 buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
4062 when it was written.
4063 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
4064 value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or
4065 written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
4066 values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
4067 reset.
4068 When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
4069 will be ignored.
4070
4071 *'more'* *'nomore'*
4072'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
4073 global
4074 {not in Vi}
4075 When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get
4076 the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the
4077 listing continues until finished.
4078 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
4079 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
4080
4081 *'mouse'* *E538*
4082'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)
4083 global
4084 {not in Vi}
4085 Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals
4086 (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, and Linux console
4087 with gpm). For using the mouse in the GUI, see |gui-mouse|.
4088 The mouse can be enabled for different modes:
4089 n Normal mode
4090 v Visual mode
4091 i Insert mode
4092 c Command-line mode
4093 h all previous modes when editing a help file
4094 a all previous modes
4095 r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
4096 A auto-select in Visual mode
4097 Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: >
4098 :set mouse=a
4099< When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for
4100 modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor.
4101
4102 See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|.
4103
4104 Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004105 "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004106 the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed.
4107 Also see the 'clipboard' option.
4108
4109 *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'*
4110'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off)
4111 global
4112 {not in Vi}
4113 {only works in the GUI}
4114 The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
4115 When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
4116 mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the
4117 default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
4118 a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
4119
4120 *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'*
4121'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on)
4122 global
4123 {not in Vi}
4124 {only works in the GUI}
4125 When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
4126 The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
4127
4128 *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'*
4129'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32)
4130 global
4131 {not in Vi}
4132 Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what
4133 the right mouse button is used for:
4134 extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works
4135 like in an xterm.
4136 popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left
4137 mouse button extends a selection. This works like
4138 with Microsoft Windows
4139 popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
4140 position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
4141 selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
4142 If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
4143 be acted upon, ie. no cursor move. This implies of
4144 course, that right clicking outside a selection will
4145 end Visual mode.
4146 Overview of what button does what for each model:
4147 mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~
4148 left click place cursor place cursor
4149 left drag start selection start selection
4150 shift-left search word extend selection
4151 right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor)
4152 right drag extend selection -
4153 middle click paste paste
4154
4155 In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
4156 You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|.
4157
4158 Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
4159 See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless
4160 selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly).
4161
4162 The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
4163
4164 *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547*
4165'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
4166 m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow"
4167 global
4168 {not in Vi}
4169 {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape|
4170 feature}
4171 This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
4172 different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much
4173 like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list
4174 and an argument-list:
4175 mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
4176 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
4177 In a normal window: ~
4178 n Normal mode
4179 v Visual mode
4180 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
4181 if not specified)
4182 o Operator-pending mode
4183 i Insert mode
4184 r Replace mode
4185
4186 Others: ~
4187 c appending to the command-line
4188 ci inserting in the command-line
4189 cr replacing in the command-line
4190 m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
4191 ml idem, but cursor in the last line
4192 e any mode, pointer below last window
4193 s any mode, pointer on a status line
4194 sd any mode, while dragging a status line
4195 vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
4196 vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
4197 a everywhere
4198
4199 The shape is one of the following:
4200 avail name looks like ~
4201 w x arrow Normal mouse pointer
4202 w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!)
4203 w x beam I-beam
4204 w x updown up-down sizing arrows
4205 w x leftright left-right sizing arrows
4206 w x busy The system's usual busy pointer
4207 w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer
4208 x udsizing indicates up-down resizing
4209 x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing
4210 x crosshair like a big thin +
4211 x hand1 black hand
4212 x hand2 white hand
4213 x pencil what you write with
4214 x question big ?
4215 x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up
4216 w x up-arrow arrow pointing up
4217 x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)
4218
4219 The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
4220 x for X11.
4221 Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
4222 pointer.
4223
4224 Example: >
4225 :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
4226< will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
4227 indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
4228 clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
4229
4230 *'mousetime'* *'mouset'*
4231'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500)
4232 global
4233 {not in Vi}
4234 Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum
4235 time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
4236 recognized as a multi click.
4237
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00004238 *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'*
4239'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100)
4240 global
4241 {not in Vi}
4242 {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme|
4243 feature}
4244 The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads.
4245 Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling.
4246
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004247 *'nrformats'* *'nf'*
4248'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "octal,hex")
4249 local to buffer
4250 {not in Vi}
4251 This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
4252 CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
4253 respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
4254 alpha if included, single alphabetical characters will be
4255 incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a
4256 letter index a), b), etc.
4257 octal if included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
4258 to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
4259 hex if included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
4260 considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on
4261 "0x100" results in "0x0ff".
4262 Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
4263 considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not
4264 recognized as octal or hex.
4265
4266 *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'*
4267'number' 'nu' boolean (default off)
4268 local to window
4269 Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is
4270 excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
4271 line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set).
Bram Moolenaar592e0a22004-07-03 16:05:59 +00004272 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
4273 number.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004274 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
4275 characters are put before the number.
4276 See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
4277
Bram Moolenaar592e0a22004-07-03 16:05:59 +00004278 *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
4279'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8)
4280 local to window
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00004281 {not in Vi}
4282 {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak|
4283 feature}
Bram Moolenaar592e0a22004-07-03 16:05:59 +00004284 Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant
4285 when the 'number' option is set.
4286 Since one space is always between the number and the text, there is
4287 one less character for the number itself.
4288 The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to
4289 fit the highest line number in the buffer. Thus with the Vim default
4290 of 4 there is room for a line number up to 999. When the buffer has
4291 1000 lines five columns will be used.
4292 The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10.
4293 NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set.
4294
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004295 *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* *E366*
4296'osfiletype' 'oft' string (RISC-OS default: "Text",
4297 others default: "")
4298 local to buffer
4299 {not in Vi}
4300 {only available when compiled with the |+osfiletype|
4301 feature}
4302 Some operating systems store extra information about files besides
4303 name, datestamp and permissions. This option contains the extra
4304 information, the nature of which will vary between systems.
4305 The value of this option is usually set when the file is loaded, and
4306 use to set the file type when file is written.
4307 It can affect the pattern matching of the automatic commands.
4308 |autocmd-osfiletypes|
4309
4310 *'paragraphs'* *'para'*
4311'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP LIpplpipbp")
4312 global
4313 Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs
4314 of two letters (see |object-motions|).
4315
4316 *'paste'* *'nopaste'*
4317'paste' boolean (default off)
4318 global
4319 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004320 Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy
4321 some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004322 unexpected effects.
4323 Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004324 cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004325 knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste'
4326 being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the
4327 mouse clicks itself.
4328 When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):
4329 - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled
4330 - abbreviations are disabled
4331 - 'textwidth' is set to 0
4332 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
4333 - 'autoindent' is reset
4334 - 'smartindent' is reset
4335 - 'softtabstop' is set to 0
4336 - 'revins' is reset
4337 - 'ruler' is reset
4338 - 'showmatch' is reset
4339 - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
4340 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:
4341 - 'lisp'
4342 - 'indentexpr'
4343 - 'cindent'
4344 NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is
4345 on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the
4346 settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to
4347 set the 'paste' option again.
4348 When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to
4349 the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on.
4350 Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect.
4351 Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use
4352 the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key.
4353
4354 *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'*
4355'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "")
4356 global
4357 {not in Vi}
4358 When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste'
4359 option. This is like specifying a mapping: >
4360 :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR>
4361< Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'.
4362 The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set.
4363 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in
4364 Command-line mode.
4365 Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However,
4366 when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do
4367 this: >
4368 :map <F10> :set paste<CR>
4369 :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR>
4370 :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR>
4371 :imap <F11> <nop>
4372 :set pastetoggle=<F11>
4373< This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode.
4374 Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste
4375 mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key
4376 sequence.
4377
4378 *'pex'* *'patchexpr'*
4379'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "")
4380 global
4381 {not in Vi}
4382 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
4383 feature}
4384 Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004385 the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004386
4387 *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206*
4388'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "")
4389 global
4390 {not in Vi}
4391 When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used
4392 to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
4393 source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a
4394 copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the
4395 name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
4396 appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like
4397 ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The
4398 backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has
4399 been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a
4400 backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is
4401 created.
4402 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
4403 Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
4404 end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
4405 recognized as a compressed file.
4406
4407 *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
4408'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
4409 on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,,"
4410 other systems: ".,,")
4411 global or local to buffer |global-local|
4412 {not in Vi}
4413 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
4414 |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find| and other commands, provided that the file
4415 being searched for has a relative path (not starting with '/'). The
4416 directories in the 'path' option may be relative or absolute.
4417 - Use commas to separate directory names: >
4418 :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
4419< - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards
4420 compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory
4421 name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: >
4422 :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
4423< - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
4424 backslash: >
4425 :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
4426< - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >
4427 :set path=.
4428< - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
4429 commas: >
4430 :set path=,,
4431< - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
4432 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
4433 - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding
4434 "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
4435 - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree:
4436 1) "*" matches a sequence of characters, e.g.: >
4437 :set path=/usr/include/*
4438< means all subdirectories in /usr/include (but not /usr/include
4439 itself). >
4440 :set path=/usr/*c
4441< matches /usr/doc and /usr/src.
4442 2) "**" matches a subtree, up to 100 directories deep. Example: >
4443 :set path=/home/user_x/src/**
4444< means search in the whole subtree under "/home/usr_x/src".
4445 3) If the path ends with a ';', this path is the startpoint
4446 for upward search.
4447 See |file-searching| for more info and exact syntax.
4448 {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
4449 - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >
4450 :set path=.,c:\\include
4451< Or just use '/' instead: >
4452 :set path=.,c:/include
4453< Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
4454 the file!
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004455 The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004456 it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
4457 You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
4458 'path', see |:checkpath|.
4459 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
4460 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
4461 uses another default. To remove the current directory use: >
4462 :set path-=
4463< To add the current directory use: >
4464 :set path+=
4465< To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
4466 separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
4467 names are separated with a semi-colon: >
4468 :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
4469< Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that
4470 this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
4471
4472 *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
4473'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off)
4474 local to buffer
4475 {not in Vi}
4476 When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
4477 indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a
4478 series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is
4479 enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option
4480 means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
4481 for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
4482 NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
4483 tabs and spaces. You might not like this.
4484 NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
4485 Also see 'copyindent'.
4486 Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
4487
4488 *'previewheight'* *'pvh'*
4489'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12)
4490 global
4491 {not in Vi}
4492 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
4493 |+quickfix| feature}
4494 Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated
4495 commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
4496
4497 *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'*
4498 *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590*
4499'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off)
4500 local to window
4501 {not in Vi}
4502 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
4503 |+quickfix| feature}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004504 Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004505 set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
4506 |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
4507
4508 *'printdevice'* *'pdev'*
4509'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty)
4510 global
4511 {not in Vi}
4512 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4513 feature}
4514 This defines the name of the printer to be used when the |:hardcopy|
4515 command is issued with a bang (!) to skip the printer selection
4516 dialog. On Win32, it should be the printer name exactly as it appears
4517 in the standard printer dialog.
4518 If the option is empty, then vim will use the system default printer
4519 for ":hardcopy!"
4520
4521 *'printencoding'* *'penc'* *E620*
4522'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for:
4523 Windows, OS/2: cp1252,
4524 Macintosh: mac-roman,
4525 VMS: dec-mcs,
4526 HPUX: hp-roman8,
4527 EBCDIC: ebcdic-uk)
4528 global
4529 {not in Vi}
4530 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4531 and |+postscript| features}
4532 Sets the character encoding used when printing. This option tells VIM
4533 which print character encoding file from the "print" directory in
4534 'runtimepath' to use.
4535
4536 This option will accept any value from |encoding-names|. Any
4537 recognized names are converted to VIM standard names - see 'encoding'
4538 for more details. Names not recognized by VIM will just be converted
4539 to lower case and underscores replaced with '-' signs.
4540
4541 If 'printencoding' is empty or VIM cannot find the file then it will
4542 use 'encoding' (if VIM is compiled with |+multi_byte| and it is set an
4543 8-bit encoding) to find the print character encoding file. If VIM is
4544 unable to find a character encoding file then it will use the "latin1"
4545 print character encoding file.
4546
4547 When 'encoding' is set to a multi-byte encoding, VIM will try to
4548 convert characters to the printing encoding for printing (if
4549 'printencoding' is empty then the conversion will be to latin1).
4550 Conversion to a printing encoding other than latin1 will require VIM
4551 to be compiled with the |+iconv| feature. If no conversion is
4552 possible then printing will fail. Any characters that cannot be
4553 converted will be replaced with upside down question marks.
4554
4555 Four print character encoding files are provided to support default
4556 Mac, VMS, HPUX, and EBCDIC character encodings and are used by default
4557 on these platforms. Code page 1252 print character encoding is used
4558 by default on Windows and OS/2 platforms.
4559
4560
4561 *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'*
4562'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below)
4563 global
4564 {not in Vi}
4565 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4566 and |+postscript| features}
4567 Expression that is evaluated to print the PostScript produced with
4568 ":hardcopy".
4569 The file name to be printed is in |v:fname_in|.
4570 The arguments to the ":hardcopy" command are in |v:cmdarg|.
4571 The expression must take care of deleting the file after printing it.
4572 When there is an error, the expression must return a non-zero number.
4573 If there is no error, return zero or an empty string.
4574 The default for non MS-Windows or VMS systems is to simply use "lpr"
4575 to print the file: >
4576
4577 system('lpr' . (&printdevice == '' ? '' : ' -P' . &printdevice)
4578 . ' ' . v:fname_in) . delete(v:fname_in) + v:shell_error
4579<
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00004580 On MS-Dos, MS-Windows and OS/2 machines the default is to copy the
4581 file to the currently specified printdevice: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004582
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00004583 system('copy' . ' ' . v:fname_in . (&printdevice == ''
4584 ? ' LPT1:' : (' \"' . &printdevice . '\"')))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004585 . delete(v:fname_in)
4586<
4587 On VMS machines the default is to send the file to either the default
4588 or currently specified printdevice: >
4589
4590 system('print' . (&printdevice == '' ? '' : ' /queue=' .
4591 &printdevice) . ' ' . v:fname_in) . delete(v:fname_in)
4592<
4593 If you change this option, using a function is an easy way to avoid
4594 having to escape all the spaces. Example: >
4595
4596 :set printexpr=PrintFile(v:fname_in)
4597 :function PrintFile(fname)
4598 : call system("ghostview " . a:fname)
4599 : call delete(a:fname)
4600 : return v:shell_error
4601 :endfunc
4602
4603< Be aware that some print programs return control before they have read
4604 the file. If you delete the file too soon it will not be printed.
4605 These programs usually offer an option to have them remove the file
4606 when printing is done.
4607 *E365*
4608 If evaluating the expression fails or it results in a non-zero number,
4609 you get an error message. In that case Vim will delete the
4610 file. In the default value for non-MS-Windows a trick is used: Adding
4611 "v:shell_error" will result in a non-zero number when the system()
4612 call fails.
4613 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
4614 security reasons.
4615
4616 *'printfont'* *'pfn'* *E613*
4617'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier")
4618 global
4619 {not in Vi}
4620 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4621 feature}
4622 This is the name of the font that will be used for the |:hardcopy|
4623 command's output. It has the same format as the 'guifont' option,
4624 except that only one font may be named, and the special "guifont=*"
4625 syntax is not available.
4626 In the Win32 GUI version this specifies a font name with its extra
4627 attributes, as with the 'guifont' option.
4628 For other systems, only ":h11" is recognized, where "11" is the point
4629 size of the font. When omitted, the point size is 10.
4630
4631 *'printheader'* *'pheader'*
4632'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N")
4633 global
4634 {not in Vi}
4635 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
4636 feature}
4637 This defines the format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output.
4638 The option is defined in the same way as the 'statusline' option.
4639 If Vim has not been compiled with the |+statusline| feature, this
4640 option has no effect and a simple default header is used, which shows
4641 the page number.
4642
4643 *'printoptions'* *'popt'*
4644'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "")
4645 global
4646 {not in Vi}
4647 {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature}
4648 This is a comma-separated list of items that control the format of
4649 the output of |:hardcopy|:
4650
4651 left:{spec} left margin (default: 10pc)
4652 right:{spec} right margin (default: 5pc)
4653 top:{spec} top margin (default: 5pc)
4654 bottom:{spec} bottom margin (default: 5pc)
4655 {spec} is a number followed by "in" for
4656 inches, "pt" for points (1 point is 1/72 of an
4657 inch), "mm" for millimeters or "pc" for a
4658 percentage of the media size.
4659 Weird example:
4660 left:2in,top:30pt,right:16mm,bottom:3pc
4661 If the unit is not recognized there is no
4662 error and the default value is used.
4663
4664 header:{nr} Number of lines to reserve for the header.
4665 Only the first line is actually filled, thus
4666 when {nr} is 2 there is one empty line. The
4667 header is formatted according to
4668 'printheader'.
4669 header:0 Do not print a header.
4670 header:2 (default) Use two lines for the header
4671
4672 syntax:n Do not use syntax highlighting. This is
4673 faster and thus useful when printing large
4674 files.
4675 syntax:y Do syntax highlighting.
4676 syntax:a (default) Use syntax highlighting if the printer appears
4677 to be able to print color or grey.
4678
4679 number:y Include line numbers in the printed output.
4680 number:n (default) No line numbers.
4681
4682 wrap:y (default) Wrap long lines.
4683 wrap:n Truncate long lines.
4684
4685 duplex:off Print on one side.
4686 duplex:long (default) Print on both sides (when possible), bind on
4687 long side.
4688 duplex:short Print on both sides (when possible), bind on
4689 short side.
4690
4691 collate:y (default) Collating: 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3
4692 collate:n No collating: 1 1 1, 2 2 2, 3 3 3
4693
4694 jobsplit:n (default) Do all copies in one print job
4695 jobsplit:y Do each copy as a separate print job. Useful
4696 when doing N-up postprocessing.
4697
4698 portrait:y (default) Orientation is portrait.
4699 portrait:n Orientation is landscape.
4700 *a4* *letter*
4701 paper:A4 (default) Paper size: A4
4702 paper:{name} Paper size from this table:
4703 {name} size in cm size in inch ~
4704 10x14 25.4 x 35.57 10 x 14
4705 A3 29.7 x 42 11.69 x 16.54
4706 A4 21 x 29.7 8.27 x 11.69
4707 A5 14.8 x 21 5.83 x 8.27
4708 B4 25 x 35.3 10.12 x 14.33
4709 B5 17.6 x 25 7.17 x 10.12
4710 executive 18.42 x 26.67 7.25 x 10.5
4711 folio 21 x 33 8.27 x 13
4712 ledger 43.13 x 27.96 17 x 11
4713 legal 21.59 x 35.57 8.5 x 14
4714 letter 21.59 x 27.96 8.5 x 11
4715 quarto 21.59 x 27.5 8.5 x 10.83
4716 statement 13.97 x 21.59 5.5 x 8.5
4717 tabloid 27.96 x 43.13 11 x 17
4718
4719 formfeed:n (default) Treat form feed characters (0x0c) as a normal
4720 print character.
4721 formfeed:y When a form feed character is encountered,
4722 continue printing of the current line at the
4723 beginning of the first line on a new page.
4724
4725 The item indicated with (default) is used when the item is not
4726 present. The values are not always used, especially when using a
4727 dialog to select the printer and options.
4728 Example: >
4729 :set printoptions=paper:letter,duplex:off
4730<
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004731 *'quoteescape''* *'qe'*
4732'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\")
4733 local to buffer
4734 {not in Vi}
4735 The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for
4736 objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
4737 When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
4738 the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the
4739 text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.
4740
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004741 *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'*
4742'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off)
4743 local to buffer
4744 If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from
4745 accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started
4746 in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
4747 {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is
4748 set for the newly edited buffer. When using ":w!" the 'readonly'
4749 option is reset for the current buffer.
4750
4751 *'remap'* *'noremap'*
4752'remap' boolean (default on)
4753 global
4754 Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for
4755 a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.
4756
4757 *'report'*
4758'report' number (default 2)
4759 global
4760 Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of
4761 changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
4762 ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
4763 For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
4764 instead of the number of lines.
4765
4766 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'*
4767'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on)
4768 global
4769 {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version}
4770 When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also
4771 happens when executing external commands.
4772
4773 For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te'
4774 options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring:
4775 set t_ti= t_te=
4776 To enable restoring (for an xterm):
4777 set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8
4778 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it)
4779
4780 *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'*
4781'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off)
4782 global
4783 {not in Vi}
4784 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
4785 feature}
4786 Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing
4787 backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
4788 command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
4789 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.
4790
4791 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
4792'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off)
4793 local to window
4794 {not in Vi}
4795 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
4796 feature}
4797 When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
4798 that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
4799 Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
4800 are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
4801 This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
4802 simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
4803 useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
4804 and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
4805 in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|.
4806
4807 *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* *'norightleftcmd'* *'norlc'*
4808'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search")
4809 local to window
4810 {not in Vi}
4811 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
4812 feature}
4813 Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
4814 right-to-left mode for a group of commands:
4815
4816 search "/" and "?" commands
4817
4818 This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
4819 The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
4820
4821 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
4822'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off)
4823 global
4824 {not in Vi}
4825 {not available when compiled without the
4826 |+cmdline_info| feature}
4827 Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004828 comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004829 text in the file is shown on the far right:
4830 Top first line is visible
4831 Bot last line is visible
4832 All first and last line are visible
4833 45% relative position in the file
4834 If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004835 Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004836 ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the
4837 screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (ie. not empty),
4838 this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat'
4839 If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
4840 bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both
4841 the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
4842 separated with a dash.
4843 For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
4844 For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
4845 This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
4846 If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
4847 you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
4848 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
4849
4850 *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'*
4851'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty)
4852 global
4853 {not in Vi}
4854 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
4855 feature}
4856 When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
4857 string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
4858 The format of this option, is like that of 'statusline'.
4859 The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15
4860 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
4861 Example: >
4862 :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
4863<
4864 *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles*
4865'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default:
4866 Unix: "$HOME/.vim,
4867 $VIM/vimfiles,
4868 $VIMRUNTIME,
4869 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
4870 $HOME/.vim/after"
4871 Amiga: "home:vimfiles,
4872 $VIM/vimfiles,
4873 $VIMRUNTIME,
4874 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
4875 home:vimfiles/after"
4876 PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles,
4877 $VIM/vimfiles,
4878 $VIMRUNTIME,
4879 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
4880 $HOME/vimfiles/after"
4881 Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles,
4882 $VIMRUNTIME,
4883 $VIM:vimfiles:after"
4884 RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles,
4885 $VIMRUNTIME,
4886 Choices:vimfiles/after"
4887 VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles,
4888 $VIM/vimfiles,
4889 $VIMRUNTIME,
4890 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
4891 sys$login:vimfiles/after"
4892 global
4893 {not in Vi}
4894 This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime
4895 files:
4896 filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype|
4897 scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts|
4898 colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme|
4899 compiler/ compiler files |:compiler|
4900 doc/ documentation |write-local-help|
4901 ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
4902 indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression|
4903 keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
4904 lang/ menu translations |:menutrans|
4905 menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim|
4906 plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin|
4907 print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding|
4908 syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
4909 tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor|
4910
4911 And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.
4912
4913 The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations:
4914 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences.
4915 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system
4916 administrator.
4917 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim.
4918 *after-directory*
4919 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is
4920 for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed
4921 defaults (rarely needed)
4922 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for
4923 personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults
4924 or system-wide settings (rarely needed).
4925
4926 Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal
4927 wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004928 runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004929 wildcards.
4930 See |:runtime|.
4931 Example: >
4932 :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
4933< This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
4934 personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a
4935 group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime
4936 files).
4937 You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the
4938 distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME
4939 to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put
4940 a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed
4941 runtime files.
4942 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
4943 security reasons.
4944
4945 *'scroll'* *'scr'*
4946'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height)
4947 local to window
4948 Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be
4949 set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
4950 changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004951 be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004952 height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives
4953 the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference
4954 when lines wrap}
4955
4956 *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'*
4957'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off)
4958 local to window
4959 {not in Vi}
4960 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
4961 feature}
4962 See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current
4963 window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have
4964 this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the
4965 differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
4966 See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be
4967 interpreted.
4968 This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
4969 file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
4970 with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
4971
4972 *'scrolljump'* *'sj'*
4973'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1)
4974 global
4975 {not in Vi}
4976 Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
4977 screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
4978 CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
4979 NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set.
4980
4981 *'scrolloff'* *'so'*
4982'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0)
4983 global
4984 {not in Vi}
4985 Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
4986 This will make some context visible around where you are working. If
4987 you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
4988 in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
4989 when long lines wrap).
4990 For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
4991 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
4992
4993 *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
4994'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump")
4995 global
4996 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
4997 feature}
4998 {not in Vi}
4999 This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
5000 'scrollbind' windows should behave.
5001 The following words are available:
5002 ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
5003 hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
5004 jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
5005 scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first
5006 displayed line of the bound windows. When moving
5007 around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
5008 reach a position before the start or after the end of
5009 the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when
5010 moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
5011 to the desired position when possible.
5012 When now making that window the current one, two
5013 things can be done with the relative offset:
5014 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
5015 adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
5016 window. When going back to the other window, the
5017 the new relative offset will be used.
5018 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
5019 scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When
5020 going back to the other window, it still uses the
5021 same relative offset.
5022 Also see |scroll-binding|.
5023
5024 *'sections'* *'sect'*
5025'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
5026 global
5027 Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of
5028 two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start
5029 at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
5030
5031 *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523*
5032'secure' boolean (default off)
5033 global
5034 {not in Vi}
5035 When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in
5036 ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are
5037 displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into
5038 problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is
5039 only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005040 dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005041 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then.
5042 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5043 security reasons.
5044
5045 *'selection'* *'sel'*
5046'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive")
5047 global
5048 {not in Vi}
5049 This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used
5050 in Visual and Select mode.
5051 Possible values:
5052 value past line inclusive ~
5053 old no yes
5054 inclusive yes yes
5055 exclusive yes no
5056 "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
5057 character past the line.
5058 "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
5059 in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the
5060 selection.
5061 Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end
5062 backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when
5063 starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
5064
5065 The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command.
5066
5067 *'selectmode'* *'slm'*
5068'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "")
5069 global
5070 {not in Vi}
5071 This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start
5072 Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
5073 Possible values:
5074 mouse when using the mouse
5075 key when using shifted special keys
5076 cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
5077 See |Select-mode|.
5078 The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command.
5079
5080 *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
5081'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
5082 help,options,winsize")
5083 global
5084 {not in Vi}
5085 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
5086 feature}
5087 Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma
5088 separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring
5089 something:
5090 word save and restore ~
5091 blank empty windows
5092 buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
5093 curdir the current directory
5094 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
5095 fold options
5096 globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter
5097 and contain at least one lowercase letter.
5098 help the help window
5099 localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
5100 global values for local options)
5101 options all options and mappings (also global values for local
5102 options)
5103 resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
5104 sesdir the directory in which the session file is located
5105 will become the current directory (useful with
5106 projects accessed over a network from different
5107 systems)
5108 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
5109 slashes
5110 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
5111 on Windows or DOS
5112 winpos position of the whole Vim window
5113 winsize window sizes
5114
5115 Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir".
5116 When "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored with
5117 absolute paths.
5118 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files
5119 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
5120 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
5121
5122 *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91*
5123'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh",
5124 MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or
5125 "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd")
5126 global
5127 Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the
5128 value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
5129 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005130 It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005131 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
5132 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
5133 If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose
5134 it in quotes. Example: >
5135 :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
5136< Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005137 each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005138 "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command
5139 name. And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
5140 separators.
5141 For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment
5142 variable to change the way external commands are executed. See the
5143 libc.inf file of DJGPP.
5144 Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be
5145 included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"
5146 works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,
5147 filtering).
5148 For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is
5149 changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: >
5150 :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos
5151< This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5152 security reasons.
5153
5154 *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
5155'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
5156 does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
5157 global
5158 {not in Vi}
5159 Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
5160 "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like
5161 systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
5162 reduce the need to set this option by the user. It's not used for
5163 OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself). See |option-backslash| about
5164 including spaces and backslashes. See |dos-shell|.
5165 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5166 security reasons.
5167
5168 *'shellpipe'* *'sp'*
5169'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")
5170 global
5171 {not in Vi}
5172 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
5173 feature}
5174 String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005175 error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005176 including spaces and backslashes.
5177 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
5178 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
5179 of this option).
5180 For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly
5181 saved in a file and not echoed to the screen.
5182 For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved
5183 in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
5184 "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the
5185 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes
5186 "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included.
5187 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
5188 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
5189 there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
5190 explicitly set before.
5191 When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
5192 ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
5193 that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do
5194 want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
5195 Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
5196 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
5197 become obsolete (at least for Unix).
5198 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5199 security reasons.
5200
5201 *'shellquote'* *'shq'*
5202'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
5203 contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")
5204 global
5205 {not in Vi}
5206 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
5207 the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the
5208 quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's
5209 probably not useful to set both options.
5210 This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for
5211 third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
5212 or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according
5213 the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
5214 user. See |dos-shell|.
5215 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5216 security reasons.
5217
5218 *'shellredir'* *'srr'*
5219'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")
5220 global
5221 {not in Vi}
5222 String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
5223 file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
5224 and backslashes.
5225 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
5226 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
5227 of this option).
5228 The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh"
5229 or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the
5230 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes
5231 ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included.
5232 For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked
5233 for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with
5234 ".exe" appended are checked for.
5235 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
5236 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
5237 there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
5238 explicitly set before.
5239 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
5240 become obsolete (at least for Unix).
5241 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5242 security reasons.
5243
5244 *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'*
5245'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off)
5246 global
5247 {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}
5248 When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is
5249 useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or
5250 cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to
5251 forward slashes by Vim.
5252 Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
5253 existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
5254 any file for best results. This might change in the future.
5255 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
5256 separator. To test if this is so use: >
5257 if exists('+shellslash')
5258<
5259 *'shelltype'* *'st'*
5260'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0)
5261 global
5262 {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga}
5263 On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work
5264 which use a shell.
5265 0 and 1: always use the shell
5266 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines
5267 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command
5268 When not using the shell, the command is executed directly.
5269
5270 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
5271 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands
5272
5273 *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
5274'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: "";
5275 for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
5276 somewhere: "\""
5277 for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
5278 global
5279 {not in Vi}
5280 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
5281 the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See
5282 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful
5283 to set both options.
5284 This is an empty string by default. Known to be useful for
5285 third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
5286 Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted
5287 according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
5288 by the user. See |dos-shell|.
5289 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
5290 security reasons.
5291
5292 *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'*
5293'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off)
5294 global
5295 {not in Vi}
5296 Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and <
5297 commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
5298 a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
5299 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
5300
5301 *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'*
5302'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8)
5303 local to buffer
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005304 Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005305 |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
5306
5307 *'shortmess'* *'shm'*
5308'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "")
5309 global
5310 {not in Vi}
5311 This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
5312 messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
5313 It is a list of flags:
5314 flag meaning when present ~
5315 f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)"
5316 i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]"
5317 l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters"
5318 m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"
5319 n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]"
5320 r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"
5321 w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message
5322 and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
5323 x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of
5324 "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]".
5325 a all of the above abbreviations
5326
5327 o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message
5328 for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on)
5329 O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message.
5330 Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn").
5331 s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search
5332 hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages
5333 t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit
5334 on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column.
5335 Ignored in Ex mode.
5336 T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to
5337 fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle.
5338 Ignored in Ex mode.
5339 W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file
5340 A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file
5341 is found.
5342 I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|.
5343
5344 This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
5345 requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
5346 possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you
5347 would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
5348 Useful values:
5349 shm= No abbreviation of message.
5350 shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
5351 shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
5352
5353 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
5354 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
5355
5356 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'*
5357'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off)
5358 local to buffer
5359 {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions}
5360 Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3
5361 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this
5362 option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when
5363 adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available
5364 for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful
5365 when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos
5366 or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this
5367 option is always on by default.
5368
5369 *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595*
5370'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "")
5371 global
5372 {not in Vi}
5373 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
5374 feature}
5375 String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful
5376 values are "> " or "+++ ".
5377 Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
5378 comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
5379 part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
5380 The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in
5381 'highlight'.
5382 Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
5383 If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
5384 "n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
5385
5386 *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
5387'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:
5388 off)
5389 global
5390 {not in Vi}
5391 {not available when compiled without the
5392 |+cmdline_info| feature}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005393 Show (partial) command in status line. Set this option off if your
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005394 terminal is slow.
5395 In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
5396 - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
5397 - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
5398 - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: linesxcolumns.
5399 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
5400 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
5401
5402 *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'*
5403'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off)
5404 global
5405 {not in Vi}
5406 When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
5407 tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005408 pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005409 matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
5410 required (coding style permitting).
5411
5412 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'*
5413'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off)
5414 global
5415 When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The
5416 jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to
5417 show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
5418 A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
5419 seen or not). This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
5420 When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
5421 will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
5422 See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
5423 blinking when showing the match.
5424 The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
5425 matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
5426 matches.
5427 Note: For the use of the short form parental guidance is advised.
5428
5429 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
5430'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
5431 global
5432 If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
5433 Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for
5434 this message.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005435 When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005436 doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is
5437 not set.
5438 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
5439 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
5440
5441 *'sidescroll'* *'ss'*
5442'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0)
5443 global
5444 {not in Vi}
5445 The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when
5446 the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
5447 When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
5448 When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using
5449 a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl"
5450 commands.
5451
5452 *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'*
5453'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0)
5454 global
5455 {not in Vi}
5456 The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
5457 right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a value
5458 greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero value
5459 makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
5460 horizontally (except at the end and beginning of the line). Setting
5461 this option to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the
5462 cursor horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not
5463 come too close to the beginning or end of the line.
5464 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
5465
5466 Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
5467 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
5468 onto the "extends" character:
5469
5470 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
5471 :set sidescrolloff=1
5472
5473
5474 *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
5475'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off)
5476 global
5477 {not in Vi}
5478 Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
5479 case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and
5480 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005481 ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.. After
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005482 "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
5483 recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
5484 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
5485
5486 *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'*
5487'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off)
5488 local to buffer
5489 {not in Vi}
5490 {not available when compiled without the
5491 |+smartindent| feature}
5492 Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like
5493 programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does
5494 something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
5495 see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on, setting 'si' has no effect.
5496 'indentexpr' is a more advanced alternative.
5497 Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
5498 An indent is automatically inserted:
5499 - After a line ending in '{'.
5500 - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
5501 - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command).
5502 When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
5503 given the same indent as the matching '{'.
5504 When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
5505 that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005506 is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005507 mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
5508 When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
5509 right.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005510 NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. When 'paste'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005511 is set smart indenting is disabled.
5512
5513 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
5514'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off)
5515 global
5516 {not in Vi}
5517 When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to
5518 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' is used in other places. A <BS> will delete
5519 a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the line.
5520 When off a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop'.
5521 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or right
5522 |shift-left-right|.
5523 What gets inserted (a Tab or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
5524 option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the
Bram Moolenaar843ee412004-06-30 16:16:41 +00005525 number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005526 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
5527
5528 *'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
5529'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0)
5530 local to buffer
5531 {not in Vi}
5532 Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing
5533 operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like
5534 <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is
5535 used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value
5536 of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However,
5537 commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
5538 When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
5539 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
5540 See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
5541 spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
5542 The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is
5543 set.
5544 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
5545
5546 *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
5547'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off)
5548 global
5549 {not in Vi}
5550 {not available when compiled without the +windows
5551 feature}
5552 When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
5553 one. |:split|
5554
5555 *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'*
5556'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off)
5557 global
5558 {not in Vi}
5559 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
5560 feature}
5561 When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
5562 current one. |:vsplit|
5563
5564 *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'*
5565'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on)
5566 global
5567 {not in Vi}
5568 When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
Bram Moolenaar843ee412004-06-30 16:16:41 +00005569 non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005570 (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B,
Bram Moolenaar843ee412004-06-30 16:16:41 +00005571 CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005572 with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing
5573 commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that
5574 only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
5575 In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
5576 where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
5577 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
5578
5579 *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E541* *E542*
5580'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty)
5581 global
5582 {not in Vi}
5583 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
5584 feature}
5585 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line.
5586 Also see |status-line|.
5587
5588 The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
5589 normal text. Each status line item is of the form:
5590 %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
5591 All fields except the {item} is optional. A single percent sign can
5592 be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified.
5593
5594 Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
5595 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.
5596
5597 field meaning ~
5598 - Left justify the item. The default is right justified
5599 when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
5600 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'.
5601 minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'.
5602 Value must be 50 or less.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005603 maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005604 on the left for text items. Numeric items will be
5605 shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number
5606 where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
5607 an exponential notation.
5608 item A one letter code as described below.
5609
5610 Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The
5611 second character in "item" is the type:
5612 N for number
5613 S for string
5614 F for flags as described below
5615 - not applicable
5616
5617 item meaning ~
5618 f S Path to the file in the buffer, relative to current directory.
5619 F S Full path to the file in the buffer.
5620 t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
5621 m F Modified flag, text is " [+]"; " [-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
5622 M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
5623 r F Readonly flag, text is " [RO]".
5624 R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
5625 h F Help buffer flag, text is " [help]".
5626 H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
5627 w F Preview window flag, text is " [Preview]".
5628 W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
5629 y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., " [vim]". See 'filetype'.
5630 Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'.
5631 {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
5632 k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
5633 being used: "<keymap>"
5634 n N Buffer number.
5635 b N Value of byte under cursor.
5636 B N As above, in hexadecimal.
5637 o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
5638 Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
5639 {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature}
5640 O N As above, in hexadecimal.
5641 N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.)
5642 l N Line number.
5643 L N Number of lines in buffer.
5644 c N Column number.
5645 v N Virtual column number.
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005646 V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005647 p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
5648 P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the
5649 percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length.
5650 a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max})
5651 Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
5652 { NF Evaluate expression between '{' and '}' and substitute result.
5653 ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and
5654 alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere.
5655 ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed.
5656 < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start.
5657 No width fields allowed.
5658 = - Separation point between left and right aligned items.
5659 No width fields allowed.
5660 * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
5661 minwid field. eg. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.
5662 The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied
5663 to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.
5664 The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9|
5665
5666 Display of flags are controlled by the following heuristic:
5667 If a flag text starts with comma it is assumed that it wants to
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005668 separate itself from anything but preceding plaintext. If it starts
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005669 with a space it is assumed that it wants to separate itself from
5670 anything but other flags. That is: A leading comma is removed if the
5671 preceding character stems from plaintext. A leading space is removed
5672 if the preceding character stems from another active flag. This will
5673 make a nice display when flags are used like in the examples below.
5674
5675 When all items in a group becomes an empty string (ie. flags that are
5676 not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
5677 become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear
5678 completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
5679 :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
5680<
5681 Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
5682 line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set
5683 temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
5684 currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context.
5685 The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
5686 real current buffer. The expression is evaluated in the |sandbox|.
5687
5688 If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
5689 a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
5690 setting an option without changing its value. Example: >
5691 :let &ro = &ro
5692
5693< A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
5694 Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
5695 described above.
5696
5697 Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable !
5698 If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
5699 edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.
5700
5701 Examples:
5702 Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
5703 :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
5704< Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >
5705 :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
5706< Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >
5707 :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
5708 :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
5709< Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >
5710 :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
5711< In the |:autocmd|'s: >
5712 :let b:gzflag = 1
5713< And: >
5714 :unlet b:gzflag
5715< And define this function: >
5716 :function VarExists(var, val)
5717 : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
5718 :endfunction
5719<
5720 *'suffixes'* *'su'*
5721'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")
5722 global
5723 {not in Vi}
5724 Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
5725 match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005726 suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as
5727 the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005728 separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
5729 including spaces and backslashes).
5730 See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
5731 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
5732 suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
5733 uses another default.
5734
5735 *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'*
5736'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "")
5737 local to buffer
5738 {not in Vi}
5739 {not available when compiled without the
5740 |+file_in_path| feature}
5741 Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
5742 file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: >
5743 :set suffixesadd=.java
5744<
5745 *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'*
5746'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on)
5747 local to buffer
5748 {not in Vi}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005749 Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005750 swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with
5751 confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
5752 Careful: All text will be in memory:
5753 - Don't use this for big files.
5754 - Recovery will be impossible!
5755 A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and
5756 'swapfile' is set.
5757 When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
5758 immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
5759 non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
5760 Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.
5761
5762 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
5763 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
5764
5765 *'swapsync'* *'sws'*
5766'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync")
5767 global
5768 {not in Vi}
5769 When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005770 writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005771 When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and
5772 not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work.
5773 On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it,
5774 so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some
5775 systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system
5776 setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default
5777 fsync(), which may work better on some systems.
5778
5779 *'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
5780'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "")
5781 global
5782 {not in Vi}
5783 This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
5784 Possible values (comma separated list):
5785 useopen If included, jump to the first open window that
5786 contains the specified buffer (if there is one).
5787 Otherwise: Do not examine other windows.
5788 This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when
5789 jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is
5790 also used in all buffer related split commands, for
5791 example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".
5792 split If included, split the current window before loading
5793 a buffer. Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
5794 Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
5795
5796 *'syntax'* *'syn'*
5797'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty)
5798 local to buffer
5799 {not in Vi}
5800 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
5801 feature}
5802 When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
5803 syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
5804 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
5805 b:current_syntax variable does).
5806 This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
5807 not automatically recognized. Example, for in an IDL file: >
5808 /* vim: set syntax=idl : */
5809< To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
5810 :set syntax=OFF
5811< To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
5812 'filetype' option: >
5813 :set syntax=ON
5814< What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
5815 Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
5816 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
5817 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
5818
5819 *'tabstop'* *'ts'*
5820'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8)
5821 local to buffer
5822 Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see
5823 |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option.
5824
5825 Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file
5826 appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it).
5827
5828 There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:
5829 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4
5830 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim
5831 will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing Tab and BS will
5832 behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.
5833 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
5834 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The
5835 formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.
5836 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005837 |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005838 works when using Vim to edit the file.
5839 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and
5840 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only)
5841 for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have
5842 tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this
5843 though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is
5844 changed.
5845
5846 *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'*
5847'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on)
5848 global
5849 {not in Vi}
5850 When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005851 use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005852 searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
5853 will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
5854 Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
5855 they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the
5856 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.
5857
5858 When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00005859 files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005860 certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When
5861 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.
5862
5863 Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
5864 at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
5865 !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some command/
5866< [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]
5867
5868 When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
5869 files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used
5870 instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
5871 Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
5872 be found in the retry.
5873
5874 If a tag file indicates that is is case-fold sorted, the second,
5875 linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case. Use a value
5876 of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be
5877 case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in
5878 the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version
5879 5.3 or higher the -f or --fold-case-sort switch can be used for this
5880 as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work.
5881
5882 When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
5883 exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags
5884 files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
5885 When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
5886 ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
5887 must be included in the tags file.
5888 This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
5889 command-line completion and ":help").
5890 {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}
5891
5892 *'taglength'* *'tl'*
5893'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0)
5894 global
5895 If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
5896
5897 *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'*
5898'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
5899 global
5900 {not in Vi}
5901 If on and using a tag file in another directory, file names in that
5902 tag file are relative to the directory where the tag file is.
5903 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
5904 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
5905
5906 *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433*
5907'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with
5908 |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS")
5909 global or local to buffer |global-local|
5910 Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To
5911 include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash
5912 (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes).
5913 When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
5914 of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
5915 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see
5916 |tags-option|.
5917 "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
5918 a directory tree. See |file-searching|. {not available when compiled
5919 without the |+path_extra| feature}
5920 If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag
5921 files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The
5922 default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case
5923 differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags|
5924 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
5925 file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
5926 uses another default.
5927 {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}
5928
5929 *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'*
5930'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on)
5931 global
5932 {not in all versions of Vi}
5933 When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or
5934 ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
5935 tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
5936 any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
5937 tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
5938 Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
5939 mapping which should not change the tagstack.
5940
5941 *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531*
5942'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails:
5943 in the GUI: "builtin_gui"
5944 on Amiga: "amiga"
5945 on BeOS: "beos-ansi"
5946 on Mac: "mac-ansi"
5947 on MiNT: "vt52"
5948 on MS-DOS: "pcterm"
5949 on OS/2: "os2ansi"
5950 on Unix: "ansi"
5951 on VMS: "ansi"
5952 on Win 32: "win32")
5953 global
5954 Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control
5955 characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
5956 For example: >
5957 :set term=$TERM
5958< See |termcap|.
5959
5960 *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'*
5961 *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'*
5962'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm")
5963 global
5964 {not in Vi}
5965 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
5966 feature}
5967 The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
5968 by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
5969 that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
5970 Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
5971 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
5972 Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
5973 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
5974 This option is reset when the GUI is started.
5975 For further details see |arabic.txt|.
5976
5977 *'termencoding'* *'tenc'*
5978'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with
5979 Macintosh GUI: "macroman")
5980 global
5981 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
5982 feature}
5983 {not in Vi}
5984 Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character
5985 encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For
5986 the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
5987 display).
5988 In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage
5989 when it differs from the ANSI codepage.
5990 *E617*
5991 Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI. After the GUI has been
5992 successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".
5993 Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error
5994 message is shown.
5995 For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters,
5996 because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters.
5997 When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.
5998 This is the normal value.
5999 Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See
6000 |encoding-table|.
6001 The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or
6002 iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you
6003 will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters.
6004 Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and
6005 want to edit a UTF-8 file: >
6006 :let &termencoding = &encoding
6007 :set encoding=utf-8
6008< You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.
6009
6010 *'terse'* *'noterse'*
6011'terse' boolean (default off)
6012 global
6013 When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message
6014 for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being
6015 displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi
6016 shortens a lot of messages}
6017
6018 *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'*
6019'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
6020 global
6021 {not in Vi}
6022 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'.
6023 For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is
6024 set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is
6025 reset, 'fileformats' is made empty.
6026 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
6027 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
6028
6029 *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'*
6030'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on,
6031 others: default off)
6032 local to buffer
6033 {not in Vi}
6034 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'.
6035 For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is
6036 set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to
6037 "unix".
6038
6039 *'textwidth'* *'tw'*
6040'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0)
6041 local to buffer
6042 {not in Vi}
6043 Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be
6044 broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006045 this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. When
6046 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006047 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
6048 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
6049
6050 *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'*
6051'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "")
6052 global or local to buffer |global-local|
6053 {not in Vi}
6054 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006055 for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006056 the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
6057 non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line
6058 length is 510 bytes.
6059 To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
6060 http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006061 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006062 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
6063 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
6064 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
6065 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
6066 uses another default.
6067 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
6068
6069 *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'*
6070'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off)
6071 global
6072 {not in Vi}
6073 When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
6074 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
6075
6076 *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'*
6077'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on)
6078 global
6079 *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'*
6080'ttimeout' boolean (default off)
6081 global
6082 {not in Vi}
6083 These two options together determine the behavior when part of a
6084 mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received:
6085
6086 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~
6087 off off do not time out
6088 on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes
6089 off on time out on key codes
6090
6091 If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete
6092 mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there
6093 is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For
6094 example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next
6095 character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'.
6096 When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for
6097 the next character to arrive. After that the already received
6098 characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can
6099 be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option.
6100 On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause
6101 malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits
6102 forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start
6103 with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have
6104 problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key
6105 sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and
6106 reset the 'timeout' option.
6107
6108 NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
6109
6110 *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'*
6111'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000)
6112 global
6113 {not in all versions of Vi}
6114 *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'*
6115'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1)
6116 global
6117 {not in Vi}
6118 The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key
6119 sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G
6120 when part of a command has been typed.
6121 Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a
6122 different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to
6123 a non-negative number.
6124
6125 ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~
6126 < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen'
6127 >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen'
6128
6129 The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options
6130 tell so. A useful setting would be >
6131 :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100
6132< (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after
6133 a tenth of a second).
6134
6135 *'title'* *'notitle'*
6136'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
6137 global
6138 {not in Vi}
6139 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
6140 feature}
6141 When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
6142 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
6143 filename [+=-] (path) - VIM
6144 Where:
6145 filename the name of the file being edited
6146 - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
6147 + indicates the file was modified
6148 = indicates the file is read-only
6149 =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified
6150 (path) is the path of the file being edited
6151 - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM"
6152 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles
6153 (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and
6154 terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and
6155 iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap).
6156 *X11*
6157 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
6158 be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11"
6159 when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also
6160 works for the icon name |'icon'|.
6161 But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title
6162 will not work (except in the GUI).
6163 If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'.
6164 You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then.
6165 When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command:
6166 rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY &
6167 then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the
6168 title of the window should change back to what it should be after
6169 exiting Vim.
6170
6171 *'titlelen'*
6172'titlelen' number (default 85)
6173 global
6174 {not in Vi}
6175 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
6176 feature}
6177 Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006178 title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
6179 shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006180 Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But
6181 it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
6182 available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
6183 bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise,
6184 values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
6185 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
6186
6187 *'titleold'*
6188'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim")
6189 global
6190 {not in Vi}
6191 {only available when compiled with the |+title|
6192 feature}
6193 This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the
6194 original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or
6195 'titlestring' is not empty.
6196 *'titlestring'*
6197'titlestring' string (default "")
6198 global
6199 {not in Vi}
6200 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
6201 feature}
6202 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
6203 window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on.
6204 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently
6205 Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a
6206 non-empty 't_ts' option).
6207 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
6208 be restored if possible |X11|.
6209 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
6210 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.
6211 Example: >
6212 :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p")
6213 :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
6214< The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
6215 of the available space.
6216 Some people prefer to have the file name first: >
6217 :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
6218< Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006219 without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006220 separating space only when needed.
6221 NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
6222 to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
6223 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
6224
6225 *'toolbar'* *'tb'*
6226'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips")
6227 global
6228 {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and
6229 |+GUI_Photon|}
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006230 The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006231 possible values are:
6232 icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons.
6233 text Toolbar buttons shown with text.
6234 horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006235 horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006236 tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons.
6237 Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse
6238 cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment.
6239
6240 If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the
6241 following: >
6242 :set tb=icons,text
6243< Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They
6244 will show icons if both are requested.
6245
6246 If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if
6247 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable
6248 the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: >
6249 :set guioptions-=T
6250< Also see |gui-toolbar|.
6251
6252 *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'*
6253'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small")
6254 global
6255 {not in Vi}
6256 {only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
6257 Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are:
6258 tiny Use tiny toolbar icons.
6259 small Use small toolbar icons (default).
6260 medium Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
6261 large Use large toolbar icons.
6262 The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
6263 the current theme. Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
6264 small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
6265
6266 If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
6267 by user preferences or the current theme is used.
6268
6269 *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'*
6270'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on)
6271 global
6272 {not in Vi}
6273 When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones.
6274 When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones.
6275 When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for
6276 the change to take effect, for example: >
6277 :set notbi term=$TERM
6278< See also |termcap|.
6279 Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin
6280 termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty
6281 xterm entries...).
6282
6283 *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'*
6284'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm,
6285 sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or
6286 iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in
6287 a DOS console)
6288 global
6289 {not in Vi}
6290 Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to
6291 the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line
6292 commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple
6293 windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region.
6294 Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen
6295 line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the
6296 mouse in an xterm and other terminals.
6297
6298 *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'*
6299'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term')
6300 global
6301 {not in Vi}
6302 {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not
6303 available when compiled without |+mouse|}
6304 Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized.
6305 Currently these three strings are valid:
6306 *xterm-mouse*
6307 xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates
6308 "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes:
6309 "s" = button state
6310 "c" = column plus 33
6311 "r" = row plus 33
6312 xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the
6313 mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works
6314 much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at
6315 least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to
6316 work. See below for how Vim detects this
6317 automatically.
6318 *netterm-mouse*
6319 netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates
6320 "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers
6321 for the row and column.
6322 *dec-mouse*
6323 dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a
6324 rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[".
6325 *jsbterm-mouse*
6326 jsbterm JSB term mouse handling.
6327 *pterm-mouse*
6328 pterm QNX pterm mouse handling.
6329
6330 The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
6331 |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
6332 Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always
6333 recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes
6334 are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not
6335 "xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict).
6336 This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
6337 set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm"
6338 or "xterm2" already. The main use of this option is to set it to
6339 "xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
6340 handle xterm mouse codes.
6341 The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
6342 95 of higher. This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
6343 feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
6344 xterm version number. Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly.
6345 If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set
6346 t_RV to an empty string: >
6347 :set t_RV=
6348<
6349 *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'*
6350'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999)
6351 global
6352 Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines
6353 to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is
6354 very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number,
6355 e.g., 3, to speed up displaying.
6356
6357 *'ttytype'* *'tty'*
6358'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM)
6359 global
6360 Alias for 'term', see above.
6361
6362 *'undolevels'* *'ul'*
6363'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
6364 Win32 and OS/2)
6365 global
6366 {not in Vi}
6367 Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information
6368 is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used
6369 (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory).
6370 Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes
6371 itself: >
6372 set ul=0
6373< But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
6374 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
6375 Set to a negative number for no undo at all: >
6376 set ul=-1
6377< This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
6378 Also see |undo-two-ways|.
6379
6380 *'updatecount'* *'uc'*
6381'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200)
6382 global
6383 {not in Vi}
6384 After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
6385 disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
6386 recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
6387 Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly
6388 mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
6389 The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|.
6390 When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
6391 created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount'
6392 is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
6393 Also see |'swapsync'|.
6394 This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile"
6395 or "nowrite".
6396
6397 *'updatetime'* *'ut'*
6398'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000)
6399 global
6400 {not in Vi}
6401 If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
6402 written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the
6403 |CursorHold| autocommand event.
6404
6405 *'verbose'* *'vbs'*
6406'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0)
6407 global
6408 {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean
6409 verbose option}
6410 When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing.
6411 Currently, these messages are given:
6412 >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written.
6413 >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed.
6414 >= 5 Every searched tags file.
6415 >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
6416 >= 9 Every executed autocommand.
6417 >= 12 Every executed function.
6418 >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
6419 >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
6420 >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters).
6421
6422 This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|.
6423 This option is also set by the |:verbose| command.
6424
6425 *'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
6426'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:
6427 "$VIM/vimfiles/view",
6428 for Unix: "~/.vim/view",
6429 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view"
6430 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view"
6431 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")
6432 global
6433 {not in Vi}
6434 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
6435 feature}
6436 Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
6437 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
6438 security reasons.
6439
6440 *'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
6441'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor")
6442 global
6443 {not in Vi}
6444 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
6445 feature}
6446 Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006447 list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006448 word save and restore ~
6449 cursor cursor position in file and in window
6450 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
6451 fold options
6452 options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
6453 global values for local options)
6454 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
6455 slashes
6456 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
6457 on Windows or DOS
6458
6459 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files
6460 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
6461 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
6462
6463 *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528*
6464'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS,
6465 Windows and OS/2: '20,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:,
6466 for Amiga: '20,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:
6467 for others: '20,<50,s10,h)
6468 global
6469 {not in Vi}
6470 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
6471 feature}
6472 When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006473 when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). The string should be a comma
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006474 separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
6475 identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
6476 which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular
6477 character is left out, then the default value is used for that
6478 parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and
6479 the effect of their value.
6480 CHAR VALUE ~
6481 ! When included, save and restore global variables that start
6482 with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
6483 letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
6484 and "_K_L_M" are not.
6485 " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of
6486 the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
6487 backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
6488 start of a comment!
6489 % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is
6490 started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
6491 restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006492 buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Buffers
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006493 without a file name and buffers for help files are not written
6494 to the viminfo file.
6495 ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
6496 are remembered. This parameter must always be included when
6497 'viminfo' is non-empty.
6498 Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
6499 |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file.
6500 / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006501 saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006502 patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of
6503 'history' is used.
6504 : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006505 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006506 < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then
6507 registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are
6508 saved. '"' is the old name for this item.
6509 Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.
6510 @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006511 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006512 c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
6513 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
6514 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|.
6515 f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0
6516 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006517 non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006518 cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
6519 h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
6520 file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
6521 has been used since the last search command.
6522 n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow
6523 the 'n'. Must be the last one! If the "-i" argument was
6524 given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
6525 given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded
6526 when opening the file, not when setting the option.
6527 r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next
6528 ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each
6529 specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
6530 stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you
6531 could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can
6532 also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is
6533 ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
6534 characters.
6535 s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are
6536 not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default
6537 "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.
6538 Also see the '<' item above: line count limit.
6539
6540 Example: >
6541 :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo
6542<
6543 '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
6544 edited.
6545 <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
6546 remembered.
6547 s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped.
6548 :0 Command-line history will not be saved.
6549 n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo".
6550 no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
6551 that is, save all of the search history, and also the
6552 previous search and substitute patterns.
6553 no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
6554 no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.
6555
6556 When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to
6557 load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.
6558
6559 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
6560 security reasons.
6561
6562 *'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
6563'virtualedit' 've' string (default "")
6564 global
6565 {not in Vi}
6566 {not available when compiled without the
6567 |+virtualedit| feature}
6568 A comma separated list of these words:
6569 block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
6570 insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
6571 all Allow virtual editing in all modes.
6572 Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
6573 no actual character. This can be halfway into a Tab or beyond the end
6574 of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
6575 editing a table.
6576
6577 *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep*
6578'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off)
6579 global
6580 {not in Vi}
6581 Use visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the
6582 visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted,
6583 use ":set vb t_vb=".
6584 Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You
6585 might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
6586 In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
6587 for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
6588 where 40 is the time in msec.
6589 Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.
6590 Also see 'errorbells'.
6591
6592 *'warn'* *'nowarn'*
6593'warn' boolean (default on)
6594 global
6595 Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
6596 has been changed.
6597
6598 *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'*
6599'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off)
6600 global
6601 {not in Vi}
6602 This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' termcap option.
6603 It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x.
6604 Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and
6605 vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running.
6606
6607 *'whichwrap'* *'ww'*
6608'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "")
6609 global
6610 {not in Vi}
6611 Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
6612 previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
6613 the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
6614 char key mode ~
6615 b <BS> Normal and Visual
6616 s <Space> Normal and Visual
6617 h "h" Normal and Visual
6618 l "l" Normal and Visual
6619 < <Left> Normal and Visual
6620 > <Right> Normal and Visual
6621 ~ "~" Normal
6622 [ <Left> Insert and Replace
6623 ] <Right> Insert and Replace
6624 For example: >
6625 :set ww=<,>,[,]
6626< allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
6627 When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
6628 operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h"
6629 different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This
6630 is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
6631 "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
6632 ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
6633 cursor.
6634 When 'l' is included, you get a side effect: "yl" on an empty line
6635 will include the <EOL>, so that "p" will insert a new line.
6636 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
6637 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
6638
6639 *'wildchar'* *'wc'*
6640'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E)
6641 global
6642 {not in Vi}
6643 Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
6644 command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
6645 The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See
6646 'wildcharm' for that.
6647 Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: >
6648 :set wc=<Esc>
6649< NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
6650 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
6651
6652 *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'*
6653'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0))
6654 global
6655 {not in Vi}
6656 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
6657 recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line
6658 keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally
6659 you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that
6660 automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: >
6661 :set wcm=<C-Z>
6662 :cmap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
6663< Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
6664
6665 *'wildignore'* *'wig'*
6666'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "")
6667 global
6668 {not in Vi}
6669 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
6670 feature}
6671 A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these
6672 patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names.
6673 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
6674 Also see 'suffixes'.
6675 Example: >
6676 :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
6677< The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
6678 a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
6679 uses another default.
6680
6681 *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
6682'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off)
6683 global
6684 {not in Vi}
6685 {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu|
6686 feature}
6687 When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
6688 mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
6689 the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the
6690 first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is
6691 one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
6692 CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
6693 When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is
6694 specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.
6695 If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on
6696 the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls
6697 as needed.
6698 The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used
6699 for selecting a completion.
6700 While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special
6701 meanings:
6702
6703 <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
6704 <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a
6705 subdirectory or submenu.
6706 <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
6707 dot: move into a submenu.
6708 <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into
6709 parent directory or parent menu.
6710
6711 This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|.
6712
6713 If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead
6714 of selecting a different match, use this: >
6715 :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
6716 :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
6717<
6718 The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match
6719 |hl-WildMenu|.
6720
6721 *'wildmode'* *'wim'*
6722'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full")
6723 global
6724 {not in Vi}
6725 Completion mode that is used for the character specified with
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006726 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006727 part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar. The
6728 first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',
6729 The second part for the second use, etc.
6730 These are the possible values for each part:
6731 "" Complete only the first match.
6732 "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match,
6733 the original string is used and then the first match
6734 again.
6735 "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't
6736 result in a longer string, use the next part.
6737 "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is
6738 enabled.
6739 "list" When more than one match, list all matches.
6740 "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and
6741 complete first match.
6742 "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and
6743 complete till longest common string.
6744 When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.
6745
6746 Examples: >
6747 :set wildmode=full
6748< Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) >
6749 :set wildmode=longest,full
6750< Complete longest common string, then each full match >
6751 :set wildmode=list:full
6752< List all matches and complete each full match >
6753 :set wildmode=list,full
6754< List all matches without completing, then each full match >
6755 :set wildmode=longest,list
6756< Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
6757
6758 *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
6759'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu")
6760 global
6761 {not in Vi}
6762 {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI}
6763 Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
6764 key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
6765 menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
6766 entering special characters. This option tells what to do:
6767 no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be
6768 mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be
6769 done with the |:simalt| command.
6770 yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key
6771 combinations cannot be mapped.
6772 menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006773 shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006774 keys can be mapped.
6775 If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
6776 key is never used for the menu.
6777 In the Win32 version, the <F10> key is handled like this too, since
6778 Windows uses it to select a menu.
6779
6780 *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
6781'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1)
6782 global
6783 {not in Vi}
6784 {not available when compiled without the +windows
6785 feature}
6786 Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006787 minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006788 current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of the
6789 height of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
6790 always fill the screen (although this has the drawback that ":all"
6791 will create only two windows). Set it to a small number for normal
6792 editing.
6793 Minimum value is 1.
6794 The height is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
6795 height of the current window.
6796 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set
6797 the minimal height for other windows.
6798
6799 *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'*
6800'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off)
6801 local to window
6802 {not in Vi}
6803 {not available when compiled without the +windows
6804 feature}
6805 Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
6806 'equalalways' is set. Set by default for the |preview-window| and
6807 |quickfix-window|.
6808 The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
6809
6810 *'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
6811'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1)
6812 global
6813 {not in Vi}
6814 {not available when compiled without the +windows
6815 feature}
6816 The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
6817 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
6818 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
6819 status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when
6820 they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
6821 Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
6822 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
6823 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
6824 windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
6825
6826 *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'*
6827'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1)
6828 global
6829 {not in Vi}
6830 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
6831 feature}
6832 The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
6833 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
6834 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
6835 a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one
6836 line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
6837 to go.)
6838 Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
6839 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
6840 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
6841 windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
6842
6843 *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
6844'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20)
6845 global
6846 {not in Vi}
6847 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
6848 feature}
6849 Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard
6850 minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If
6851 the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
6852 the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
6853 always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing.
6854 The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
6855 width of the current window.
6856 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set
6857 the minimal width for other windows.
6858
6859 *'wrap'* *'nowrap'*
6860'wrap' boolean (default on)
6861 local to window
6862 {not in Vi}
6863 This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text
6864 in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
6865 When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006866 displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap
6867 and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006868 moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
6869 horizontally.
6870 The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See
6871 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
6872 To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >
6873 :set sidescroll=5
6874 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
6875< See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
6876
6877 *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'*
6878'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0)
6879 local to buffer
6880 Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
6881 starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
6882 and inserting continues on the next line.
6883 Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
6884 the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible.
6885 When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
6886 See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently
6887 and less usefully}
6888
6889 *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'*
6890'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385*
6891 global
6892 Searches wrap around the end of the file.
6893
6894 *'write'* *'nowrite'*
6895'write' boolean (default on)
6896 global
6897 {not in Vi}
6898 Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
6899 Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00006900 still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006901 argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
6902 writing a temporary file.
6903
6904 *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'*
6905'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off)
6906 global
6907 Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
6908
6909 *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'*
6910'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off
6911 otherwise)
6912 global
6913 {not in Vi}
6914 Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after
6915 the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
6916 also on. Reset this option if your file system is almost full. See
6917 |backup-table| for another explanation.
6918 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
6919 NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
6920 set.
6921
6922 *'writedelay'* *'wd'*
6923'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0)
6924 global
6925 {not in Vi}
6926 The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the
6927 screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by
6928 one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes.
6929
6930 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: